i

ii

iii

iv

Copyright, 1923, by EugeneFersen

v

vi

vii

Let those who read this book understandthat its main object is to bring Enlighten-ment to Humanity through Pure Knowl-edge aflame with Love, and its mission is topave the way to Peace and Harmony andPower.Though a book of Science? it is a friend oftrue Religions and Philosophies. They willfind their fundamental tenets scientificallyexplained by the Science of Being, whichwill also show them that they are all broth-ers, because Truth is One, and is the GoldenThread on which are strung the variedpearls of Religions and Philosophies.The day will come when Humanity willhave outgrown its present concepts ofDivinity, when Man will have lost his faithin teachings based on Faith alone, the daywhen utter despair will grip the heart of aWorld which has lost its God. Humanitywill then discover through the Science thisbook teaches that God has always lived withmen, yet they have not known Him.

viii

ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Introduction .

LESSON ONE-THE ABSOLUTE (SPIRIT) I

The Great Principle.....................5 The Pyramid of Life . . . . 15 The Five Statements of Being . . 29 The Three Attributes of Divinity . . 36 Trinity...............................38 Scientific Definition of Man . 47 Questions and Answers 48

LESSON TWO-LIFE ENERGY (I)

Vibrations ...........................59 The Mental Contact....................62 The Star Exercise.....................64 Qualities of Universal Life Energy . 70 Causes of Physical Discomfort . . . 73 Human Emotions........................74 Use of the Magnetic Force in Modern and Ancient Times...................77 Concentration of the Magnetic Force in Inanimate Objects................78 Questions and Answers.................81

x

LESSON THREE-TILE RELATIVE (MATTER) . . . . 89 The Origin of Matter . . 91 Aspects of Matter........................92 Scientific Definition of Matter . . 97 The Universe . . . . 100 The Law of Attraction...................101 The Universe, the Worlds, and the Law of Attraction.....................102 Indestructibility of Energy, Sub- stance, the Universe, and the Soul 106 Scientific Definition of the Soul . . . 108 Soul the Basis of Man's Existence . 111 Incarnation of Soul in Matter . . 115 The Human Body and How to Sus- tain It . .....................122 The Material Body in its Last Analysis..............................125 Questions and Answers...................129

LESSON FOUR- LIFE ENERGY (II) . 139 Radio-activity..........................141 The Human Aura..........................141 The Use of Universal Life Energy in Daily Life............................145 Healing by Use of Universal Life Energy................................147 Self-Treatment..........................151 Magnetic Chemicalization................152 Magnetic Sleep..........................153 Success and Prosperity..................156

xi

Rejuvenation . . . 157 Questions and Answers . . 165

LESSON FIVE-LAWS, ABSOLUTE AND RELATIVE . . 175

Laws of the Absolute..................177 The Law of Life and of Spirit 178 The Great Law.......................179 The Law of Vibration ...............182 Laws of the Relative ................183 The Law of Polarity.................183 The Law of Rhythm...................194 The Law of Gender ..................204 The Law of Cause and Effect . . 216 The Law of Love ......................224 The Law of Evolution..................229 Questions and Answers.................232

LESSON SIX- MIND FORCE..................245

Mental Vibrations.....................248 The Telepathic Apparatus . . . . 248 The Concentrated Thought . . . 251 The Self-Consciousness and the Sub- Consciousness.......................254 Mental Laws...........................257 The Power of the Concentrated Thought in Daily Life...............264 Mental Treatments.....................265 Mental Self-Protection................271 Mental Self-Treatments................272

xii

Treatments at a Distance.............273 Intuition............................277 Questions and Answers................280

LESSON SEVEN--SPIRITUAL. POWER 293

The Way to Obtain Spiritual Power . 295 Theory of Spiritual Vibrations . . . 297 The Baptism by Fire..................303 The Two Roads........................304 The Origin of Evil...................306 The Legend-"The Dream" . . . 307 Questions and Answers................322

1

Lesson One

2

3

GREAT question-the great-est of all questions-has beenasked by Humanity for count-less ages, "Is there a God?"From the point of view of

Religion, it is accepted on faith that thereis a God, a Divinity, Who is called theFather of Man and of the Universe. Buthuman beings are not satisfied with believingon faith; they want to know, to have irre-.futable proofs of the existence of Divinity.Therefore has it become the task of Scienceto investigate the matter and find an answerto this question, an answer which willsatisfy the searching of the rational mind;and Science has solved the problem nobly.

4

Through scientific investigation, itdiscovered that there is a Universal Forcewhich may be termed Eternal Energy-Primal Energy-pervading the wholeUniverse, filling Infinite Space.If Primal Energy fills Infinite Space forone moment, it becomes at that moment onewith Space; and if it is one with Space forone moment, it must be one with Space forEternity, because there is no place where itcan lose itself. Therefore, by logical reason-ing, the Basic Energy of the Universe isfound to be Infinite, and at the same timeEternal, has always been and always will beso. Through further investigation, it wasdiscovered that Infinite Energy expressesitself in most admirable laws, sublimelaws; that it shows the profoundest in-telligence and logic, a self-consciousnessexpressed in the divinest terms; laws in-variable, true to themselves, mathemati-cally correct, and above all, harmoniousand beautiful.As a result of all this reasoning, was dis-covered, through Its first Universal Mani-festation as Primal Energy, That which hasalways existed, the Eternal Unmanifestcalled God, conscious of Its own power, lawemitting, law abiding and most Harmonious.In other words, there is a Unit, a One,existing eternally, expressing Itself throughIts Creation, the Universe, consciouslygoverning it, sustaining it in a condition ofEternal Harmony, and loving it-for har-mony and Love are one. Harmony meansAttraction. Love IS Attraction.Thus Science has discovered Divinityunder another name. Therefore for theword "God," which would have been used inReligion or Philosophy, will be substituteda word having a deeper meaning, coveringbroader ground ,-the word "Principle."The word Principle is not related especial-ly to Divinity, but applies equally to everyscience, logic, activity and art, as the princi-ple of music, the principle of mathematics,

5

etc. The word Principle gives a clearer ideaof the Great First Cause, of Divinity, thandoes the word "God." The word itself can-not be exhausted by its various definitions,and if instead of a few definitions, weshould give ten thousand, the whole groundwould not have been covered. Yet thereare five words which characterize the word"Principle" in general, including Principle asapplied to the Great First Cause (Divinity),The Great Principle.

Scientific Definition of the WordPrinciple

"PRINCIPLE IS THAT WHICH CREATES,CONSTITUTES, GOVERNS, SUSTAINS ANDCONTAINS ALL." These five words includeall the various lesser definitions. What mustPrinciple do first? First it must CREATE,because it cannot handle anything before ithas created the very thing it has to handle.

6

Thus the first activity of each principle, nomatter if it is the principle of music or ofmathematics or of anything else, must becreation. The principle of music createsnotes, the principle of mathematics createsnumbers, etc.But creation does not inevitably meanorder. It may be chaos. So that thereshould be order, it must CONSTITUTE, thatis, assign to each phenomenon its properplace which it will keep eternally. Withnumbers, the activity of constitution de-mands that one is made I, two is made 2,three is made 3, etc. and each has its properplace. Two can never lapse into three, orthree can never become four,-they are allIMMUTABLE. It is only because they arewhat they are, eternally, immutably, thatwe can calculate at all mathematically. Themost complicated, intricate calculations arepossible only because each cipher has itsplace assigned, constituted in order out ofchaos.What is the next activity of Principle? Itmust bring forth out of itself its laws-changeless laws-by which it GOVERNS thatwhich it has created and that which it hasput in order, constituted. These laws arethen named. There are, for example, thelaws of mathematics. Through the applica-tion of these laws we attain the invariableresult of our calculations. If we misapplythe laws we make mistakes. This appliesequally to music, to logic, etc.

7

But the acts of creation, constitution andgoverning may be for but a moment. Thereis nothing in these three activities whichensures their continuance. After Principlehas created, constituted and governed, itmust SUSTAIN its very creation so as tomake it permanent, eternal.And finally, if Principle creates every-thing there is out of itself, it must then CON-TAIN within itself all its creation. It mustbe the father of its creation. It must be thecircumference, from within which springs allcreation; and since Principle from its owncenter creates all and becomes its own cir-cumference, therefore, it is the center andcircumference of all. PRINCIPLE IS ALL.So it is with the Great Principle, TheGreat First Cause, Whom we call Divinity,or God. FROM ETERNITY OUT OF ITSELFTHE GREAT PRINCIPLE CREATED THEUNIVERSE, NCLUDING MAN AND EVERY-THING ELSE IN THE UNIVERSE. FROMETERNITY IT ASSIGNED TO EACH CRE-ATED THING ITS PROPER PLACE. Everyblade of grass has its place, every star knowsits course; and as long as all keep their placesand perform their duties, the Law of Orderin the Universe continues to operate. But ifthey should slip from their places or fail intheir duties, there is chaos. The Law ofOrder and Harmony is transgressed.AFTER IT HAS ASSIGNED TO EVERY-THING ITS PROPER IDENTITY, ITS IN-DIVIDUALITY, IT ISSUES FROM ITSELF

8

THE UNIVERSAL, CHANGELESS LAWS,WHICH THEN GOVERN THEM. Everythingdown to the smallest electron is governedby Its Laws-Laws as precise, as invariable,as mathematical as the laws of mathematicsitself, for mathematics is part of Its Creationand is therefore subject to Its Laws. Noth-ing can be above or beyond these Laws, forthey are a manifestation of the EternalActivity of the Great Principle Itself.THE FOURTH ACTIVIT OF THE GREATPRINCIPLE IS ITS POWER TO SUSTAIN. ITPOURS OUT ALL LIFE AND ENERGY FROMITSELF, AND SANCTIONS AND SUPPORTSITS OWN LIFE, INTELLIGENCE, LAWS ANDLOVE SO THAT THEY WILL EXIST WITH ITETERMALLY. From It proceeds all.And lastly, as the mother-bird covers herfledglings with her wing, so the GreatPrinciple enfolds all Creation within Itsboundless protection and Love. IT CON-TAINS THE WHOLE UNIVERSE and there-fore may be said to be in a way greater thanIts own Creation. Yet It is identical withCreation, for Creation is the exact counter-part of the Great Principle, the EternalUnmanifest, of which we perceive but theManifestation. No one has seen the GreatPrinciple, the Unmanifest, at any lime. Weperceive and appreciate It only through Itsmanifest Laws. THE UNIVERSE IS THEMANIFASTATION AND SCIENTIFIC,ACTUAL PROOF OF THE EXISTENCE OFGREAT PRINCIPLE.

9

TO THIS PRESENT STATE OF HUMANCONSCIOUSNESS, THE GREAT PRINCIPLEAPPEARS IN FOUR DISTINCT ASPECTS-LIFEMINDTRUTHLOVEThey are in a certain scientific order;they have been so eternally and cannot bechanged. It has been said, "God is firstLove." But one cannot love if one does notalready live, and even Divinity Itself cannotreverse such a sequence. THE GREATPRINCIPLE IS FIRST LIFE. It must firstlive and then It can think. It must firstlive and then It can express Truth, Law. Itmust first live and then It can love. THEFIRST ASPECT OF THE GREAT PRINCIPLE,THEREFORE, IS LIFE.What comes next? MIND. For Life mustbecome conscious of itself, conscious of itsown existence. If it were not conscious ofitself, Life might be said not to exist com-pletely; but it is able to say, "I think, there-fore I am."Next must come TRUTH, LAW. The SelfConscious Life must be true to itself eter-nally, law-emitting, law-abiding, since it canonly work harmoniously when it is true toitself.And finally, what must be last? It mustbe LOVE-HARMONY. For if Life were notcapable of Love, of Harmony, it would beset against itself, repelling instead of attract-

10

ing, self-hating and therefore self-destruc-tive. Love and Harmony are synonymousterms. LOVE IS THE LAW AND ALSO THEFULLFLING OF THE LAW; it is Love alonethat sets the seal of Eternity on all; it is Lovealone that justifies Eternity and makes itwhat it should be, a blessing. Without Love,Eternity would be the most terrible hellimaginable, for it is only when we know thatthere will be Everlasting Harmony that wecan face Eternity. And the only guaranteeof Eternal Harmony lies in the fact that TheGreat Principle Itself must love eternally, inorder to maintain throughout Eternity ItsOwn Existence. That is why we cling toLove to the very last, when all else, Life andMind and even Truth, have apparentlyfailed us. LOVE IS NOT FIRST IN ORDERBUT IN IMPORTANCE. Whatever else maybe achieved will be of no use without Love,for it is the beauty and radiance and joy ofthe Universe.These are the Pour Aspects of the GreatPrinciple. They are instantaneous and simul-taneous, yet expressed in their logical order.This order cannot be changed; it is funda-mental and scientific. Those Four Aspects ofthe Great Principle, as manifested in ourlives, may be regarded as the four corners ofa perfect square, and their mutual relationsanalyzed from a scientific point of view.Let us take the upper left corner, Life.What does Life face, if we pass a line acrossthe square diagonally? We find Life facing

11

Truth. What does this mean? It meansthat THE FIRST ETERNAL DUTY OF LIFEIS TO BE LIVED, that it must be true to

itself. For if Life is not expressed throughactivity there is no hope possible for it. Inorder that there should be continued activity,energy manifested (thus making all elsepossible) Life must be true to its own mis-sion, TO LIVE; for this reason it faces Truth.What has Life on its right side? It hasMind. The right side is always consideredthe dominant side, because it stands for theright. Therefore Life has Mind on its rightside. This implies that LIFE MUST BE CON-SCIOUS OF ITS OWN EXISTENCE, of its ownoperations, of its own duties, for if it werenot self-conscious, it could not achieve allthat it should achieve.Upon the left side, Life has Love. This

12

means that Life must not only be constantlyactive, conscious of itself and its activities,but that in order to be eternal, IT MUSTALSO BE A LOVING AND HARMONIOUSLIFE. It is the left side which is the side ofthe heart, the organ, the symbol of Love.We come now to the lower left corner ofthe square, Mind, and draw a line across thesquare diagonally. What does Mind face?It faces Love. This means that the Mind'seternal duty is to be expressed first in Love;it must interpret Harmony, for without thisnothing would be good in its work. There-fore, Mind must always face Love. THIS ISTHE GREAT LESSON THAT MIND HAS TOLEARN, THE LESSON OF LOVE.What has Mind on its right side? It hasTruth. This means that it must demonstrateTruth, because Mind had once pervertedTruth in his own nature. It is said of Satanthat he was a liar from the beginning; andyet Satan is Lucifer, is Mind. Therefore,THE NEXT LESSON THAT MIND MUSTLEARN IS TO BE TRUE. Truth implies Law-a constant reminder to Mind to be law-abiding, for it was Mind also that firstviolated the Law.And upon the left side, Mind has Life.It must express activity--MIND MUST BEOPERATING, THINKING. As that is anatural function for Mind, it becomes asecondary duty; hence Mind has Life on itsleft side.At the third corner of the square stands

Truth. What does Truth face? It facesLife, for TRUTH MUST FIRST BE LIVED.Truth which is not lived is not Truth. Forthat reason, the first thing that Truth hasalways to face is its own expression, itsmanifestation.Law, the corollary of Truth, must bedemonstrated, put into operation. TheLaws of the Universe must be eternaland voicing themselves eternally, or theUniverse would sink into chaos.

13

And what stands upon the right side ofTruth as its dominant power? Love. FORTRUTH, LAW, MUST PROVE ITSELF TO BEARDENT, COMPASSIONATE, TENDER, aLaw of harmony and beauty. It must beradiant and great-hearted, not the cold, drytruth of the intellect. It is the burningTruth of Love.On the left side of Truth stands Mind. Itsignifies that Truth must be expressed con-sciously; the Law must be intelligentlyformulated; but those functions being naturalto Truth, Mind is placed on the left side of it.And finally to the fourth activity of TheGreat Principle. What does Love face?Love faces Mind. Love manifests itself last,but is the most sublime of the Pour Aspects.IT IS A POWER SO GREAT, A GIFT SO PRE-CIOUS, THAT IT MUST NEVER BE WASTEDOR MISUSED. IT MUST BE USED INTELLI-GENTLY; FOR THAT REASON IT FACESMIND OR THE CAPACITY OF DISCRIMINA-TION. Jesus said: "Cast not your pearls

14

before swine." Do not squander Love, theprecious gift, on those who do not under-stand it. Jesus knew these Laws, and the re-lation of these Aspects of the Great Principleto each other; therefore he warns us to becareful not to throw away this most wonderfultreasure. SO LOVE MUST FIRST FACE MIND.What has Love upon its right side? It hasLife. This means that Love must be con-tinually expressed in activity, IF WE DOJIOT LIVE LOVE, THEN WE DO NOT LOVE.At its left side is Truth. Love must betrue to itself. But Love IS always true toitself. Truth, Law, is a very secondarypower for Love, because by its own har-monious nature it is always law-abiding,always true to itself.The Two greatest powers in the World,Love and Mind, are facing each other in theSquare. They are the two manifestations, thefirst dual emanations of the great Principle,of Divinity, - Christ and Lucifer. Loveexpresses Christ; Mind expresses Lucifer.Satan was once called Lucifer, The Carrier ofEternal Light; his Eternal Mate was Christ,the Anointed One. But Mind in his pridehad fallen, AND CHRIST, LOVE, TO SAVETHE WORLD, ASSUMED THE ACTIVITIESWHICH HAD BELONGED TO LUCIFER ANDBECAME BOTH IDEAL LOVE AND PERFECTMIND. Originally it was not so, and finallyit will also not be so. There will come anadjustment, and the two counterparts willbe re-united and become equal again.

15

Mind comes to us and leads us to Perfec-tion, yet it cannot enter with us through thedoor of Perfection, of Heaven, for it is anexile from Heaven. For the time being it isshut out; and because it is seemingly sepa-rated from the Infinite Principle, it cannotgrasp Infinity. It is only through Intuitionand through emotion, especially of the higherself, that we can become One with the GreatPrinciple, and rise into the highest vibra-tions, into the Infinite All. Mind can notbring us there. It is Love, the Christ in ournature, that part of us which has neverfallen and which has remained perfecteternally, which ALONE CAN LEAD USBACK TO INFINITY. It is therefore ourduty to work out of the limitations imposedon us by Mind, the Lucifer principle in us,and to ATTUNE MIND TO THE CHRISTPRINCIPLE IN US; this redemption willunite again these two apparently diverseprinciples in Eternal Harmony.Now if equal lines are drawn from the fourcorners of the square upwards to a commonpoint, the figure produced will be a pyramid.And if we work harmoniously and simul-taneously from the four corners, Life, Mind,Truth, and Love, and extend these to onepoint, that point will symbolize SPIRIT, theAbsolute, the All-inclusive Principle fromwhich everything proceeds and to which itfinally returns. The ancient Pyramid of theEgyptians, built so many centuries ago,meant this very thing. It meant Divinity

16

working from the four-square of Humanity,through Life, Mind, Truth and Love to Itsown apex, Spirit.

Geometrically it would be impossible toconstruct a perfect pyramid unless each sidewere equal to the others; the apex wouldnever be reached if even one side failed in itsproportions. So it is just as impossible fromthe point of view of the Absolute Law toreach Spirit, if any one of the Aspects of theGreat Principle in us is at fault. THE FOURSIDES MUST BE HARMONIOUSLY EQUAL;none must fail or dominate the others. Weshould not concern ourselves too much aboutreaching the apex, Spirit, if only we workconscientiously at harmonizing the foursides, for the Law itself will lock after theresults of our work.We are building up the ground under our-elves in working out these four Aspects ofhe Great Principle, for EVERY TIME THATWE PERFORM AN ACTION ENERGETIC-ALLY, INTELLIGENTLY, ACCURATELY,AND LOVINGLY WE HAVE PLACED BE-NEATH OUR FEET A STRATUM THAT

17

EXTENDS TO THE FOUR ANGLES OF OURSQUARE. Thus we have risen by this much,and gradually, using every activity per-formed with energy, intelligence, accuracyand love, as a step upwards, we shall risenearer and nearer to that point which isSpirit, and which is the final goal of all humanendeavor. When we reach Spirit we donot ourselves know how we reached It. Nordo we need to know, for it works accordingto Law, and all we must do is to LET THELAW WORK FOR US AND NOT CONCERNOURSELVES WITH THE FRUITS OF OURACTIONS. If the work is good, the resultwill be good, according to the law of Causeand Effect. It is all so simple, and yethuman beings so little understand it andwonder why their progress is stopped. Someone says, "I am so loving, so generous, I amwilling to give everything. Why can I notrise?" Perhaps one of his qualities is notdeveloped, one of the corners of his pyramidnot properly built.The problem is to find out which one of thecorners is underdeveloped. Let us take, forinstance, any one of the little daily actionswhich all of us have continually to performin our lives not something which weespecially like to do, but just an ordinaryaction which has more the character of aduty than of pleasure-and let us analyzehow we perform that action. If we do itenergetically, the Life corner is stronglybuilt. If we do it intelligently, the Mind

18

corner is properly represented. If we do itaccurately, the corner of Truth (Law) is alsowell balanced. And if we do it lovingly, theLove corner is then in harmony with theother three corners. But if we discover inthe actions we analyze that some of thosefour qualities are too weak in comparisonwith the strong, all we have to do is toreinforce the weak characteristics in orderthat they should strike a proper balance withthe strong. NOW BY ONE OF THOSE ORDI-NARY ACTIONS OF OURS WE CAN FINDOUT THE WHOLE OF OUR CHARACTER, justas by analyzing a drop of water taken from apool we are able to discover all the qualitiesof the water of the whole pool. In correctingthe weak sides in those little daily actions ofours, we will by and by improve our wholecharacter and make it harmonious, thusproperly building up our Life Pyramid. Thiswill secure us a speedy progress in our indi-vidual evolution.THE POINT IS THE CONSUMMATION OFPERFECT HARMONY FROM ALL SIDES.From these four basic corners, from the so-called human square, we rise to the DivinePoint. If we look down from above, wefind the Four Aspects, the Manifestationbelow; and if we look up from the Four webehold the one Point, Unity,. the GreatPrinciple, the Unmanifest, Spirit.And thus we have also the correlation ofnumbers; we have the number four of ourhuman square and the number three of the

19

Divine triangle represented in the side ofthe pyramid, four added to three makingseven, a number of completeness. Besidesthat, by multiplying four and three, we havetwelve, again a number of completeness, butmanifesting it under a different aspect.Seven and twelve play a very important rolein our present stage of Evolution.When we realize these Aspects of theGreat Principle, our duty is naturally tomanifest them in our lives, to live the FourAspects. What does it mean TO LIVE LIFE?Of course we are all living. To live Lifemeans much more than that. IT MEANS TODO ALWAYS ONE'S DUTY AT THE RIGHTTIME. Now most human beings do not atall do their duty at the right time. Theyhave no idea of the necessity of doing it atthe right time. Imagine an orchestra play-ing; the duty of each musician, according tothe laws of orchestration, is to sound hisnotes, to play his passage, at a certain time;and if he and his fellow musicians do itproperly, we have beautiful and harmoniousmusic. But if each musician were to playhis notes a little earlier or a little later, whatwould happen? There would be discord. Ina way man cannot play false, because allnotes are true notes; but man can play falsewhen he plays the right notes at the wrongtime. This is the very thing we do when weindividuals fail in our duties. We either dothe right thing at the wrong moment, orelse when the right moment comes we forget

20

our obligations. The result for us is discord.The discord which we create, in this waythe most detrimental, because if our actionare maladjusted and ill-timed, we start newcauses which will have their results at a giventime; and if the causes are started at thewrong time the effets also will come at thewrong time. Either way we plant the seedsof disharmony, and for that vary reason sooften we do not seem adjusted to our lives,and find that things continually happen tous in a disharmonious way. Our days aremade up of a number of small events, some ofwhich are seemingly important, some of noimportance; but there is usually somethingthat does not work properly, and the causeof it is an action hidden in the past. We hadnot performed our duty at the right time.We must always see if there is an obligationto meet, and we must not fail in it. If thereis a greater duty to perform and a smallerone to perform, and we see that there issome one who is able to perform the smallerduty in our place, we are justified in leavingit and taking up the greater. But if there isno one to perform the smaller duty and thesmaller was the first to appear, we mustaccomplish that one first; for after all it isnothing but a human concept of smallness orgreatness. Everything is great in a way-and everything is small in a way. In asymphony one note is not more importantthan another note. They are all equallyimportant. The most delicate note is just

21

as important as the deepest sounding one,because each has its proper place. Therefore,we must not forget that Life is just as scien-tific as the music of an orchestra, and thatif we want to live our lives harmoniously,we must play our part as conscientiously aswe would in an orchestra. Life is one greatorchestra. That is what is meant by livingLife, TO DO ONE'S DUTY ALWAYS AT THEPROPER TIME AND NEVER TO WORRYABOUT THE RESULT. THE RESULT WILLCOME RIGHT INEVITABLY IF WE ACTRIGHTLY. There is a Law that will show theway. When we shall know the Law, wewill move through our lives in serenity.Now what does it mean TO LIVE LIFECONSCIOUSLY, INTELLIGENTLY-to dem-onstrate Mind in our Life? Of course weare all thinking people; some of us arepeople of much knowledge, of great intellect;and yet to demonstrate Intelligence, Mind,in our lives means more than that. It meansthat WE SHOULD ALWAYS JUDGE RIGHT-LY, ALWAYS KEEP TO THE MAIN ISSUES,ALWAYS TAKE THE ESSENTIAL AND GIVETO THE NON-ESSENTIAL ITS PROPERPLACE. Above all, it means that WESHOULD NOT LOSE OURSELVES IN DE-TAILS, that we should retain a proper mentalperspective, because to lose oneself in detailsis one of the besetting sins of Humanity. Ifwe wish to analyze a tree, and come so nearto it that we can see only the leaves, we willfind that we have no right impression of the

22

tree as a whole. The study of a leaf willnot reveal the character of the tree. Wemust stand at some distance in order to seethe complete tree; then only is it possible tosay, "There is the trunk, these are thebranches, and these are the leaves." Thatis what we should do, and that is what sofew of us do in life. We are usually losingourselves in details, and giving to non-essentials a more important role than toessentials. TO LIVE INTELLIGENTLYMEANS TO GIVE TO EACH PERSON AND TOEACH THING THEIR PROPER PLACE, tokeep one's judgment clear and to try to judgeas impartially as possible. In other words,TO SIMPLIFY THINGS AND NOT COMPLI-CATE THEM. The complexity of life inevery direction is one of the greatest failingsof the world, especially of our moderncivilization. The Great Principle is the OnePoint. There is nothing more simple than apoint. At the same time the Great Principleis a Sphere. There is nothing more perfect,complete, and at the same time more simplethan a sphere. It is perfection in absolutesimplicity.Now what does it mean TO LIVE TRUTH?We are taught to be truthful, and we realizethe offense of a deliberate lie. Yet to liveTruth is more than that. It signifies thatWE SHOULD MEAN ALWAYS WHAT WESAY. Most of us human beings do not meanat all in our conversation what we say. Weusually say one thing and mean another

23

entirely different. We say, "I love you somuch that I would die for you!" How manyof us really mean this? With most it isonly a manner of talking. We live in suchan age of exaggeration, that when we comein contact with people who tell the truth, wedo not always believe it. We have grownaccustomed to discount the truth. Peopledo not realize consciously the tremendousvalue of having the word correspond to thethought. In a certain passage of the SacredBook called the Bible, a chapter begins: "Inthe beginning was the Word and the Wordwas with God and the Word was God."What does it mean? IN THE BEGINNINGEXISTED THE VIRTUE OF OMNIPOTENCE,THE POWER TO MANIFEST, TO EXPRESSITSELF, AND IT WAS WITH THE GREATPRINCIPLE AND IT WAS THAT GREATPRINCIPLE. Therefore is the word so tre-mendously powerful. A WORD SHOULD BEA CREATION, SHOULD BE LAW. How havewe human beings used the word? As somany dead leaves, as so much worthlesssound, as of no value. And this is a greatloss for us because we are squandering one ofthe greatest powers in the Universe, thepower of Truth. Therefore TO LIVE TRUTHIS ALWAYS TO MEAN WHAT WE SAY. Whenwe say it is day, we must mean it is day, andwhen we say it is night, we must mean night;and if for some reason we feel that we cannottell the truth, it is better not to say anythingthan to tell a lie, because of THE DISCON-

24

NECTION BETWEEN THE THOUGHT ANDTHE WORD. For thus both thought andword are rendered powerless. The law saysthat the effect must correspond to the cause.Therefore, in disconnecting the two, weare violating one of the fundamental Laws,the Law of the Great Principle, a Law sopotent in our hands. THERE IS NO COM-PROMISE WITH THE ABSOLUTE.There is yet another point. We often telluntruths in jest. We do not mean it. Weknow it is an untruth and it is meant to bean untruth. We very often make fun ofpeople and things without really meaning tobe unkind or wishing to do harm. But thereis a law which states that RIDICULE KILLS.IF WE MAKE FUN OF SOMETHING, WEKILL IN THE INDIVIDUAL.. THE SENSE OFTHAT SOMETHING. If it is a good thing,something emanating from the Source ofPerfection, it cannot be killed; hut we candestroy in an individual his sense of thatthing, which is the same as killing it in him.There is an orator who makes a speech fullof intelligence and sincerity, and who im-presses his audience with the power andbeauty of his words. The opposing party canmost easily destroy the effect of his speech byridicule. A better or more noble speechwould not as easily destroy it, but a fewfrivolous words of derision would make aburlesque of his speech, would make hisaudience laugh, and in that moment woulddestroy their sense of the value of the speech.

25

Many know this power and use it. Manyuse the power and do not know it. It is im-portant, therefore, to know that we candestroy whatever we want by ridicule, bylaughing at it, but we must be careful that itis not something good, or sacred to us.Ridicule and laughter are like a two-edgedsword-they destroy in both directions. Ifwe have something which is sacred to us andwhich we would keep sacred for ourselves,we should never let anyone make fun of it,because in ourselves it will be destroyed. Itis the operation of the law. Nature hasgiven us the gift of laughter to neutralizenegative impressions? because there is somuch disharmony around us, that if we didnot have that gift we would be absolutelyoverwhelmed by disharmony. That is why,when we see something inharmonious, welaugh at it. If we were to take it seriously itwould not be destroyed and would harm us;and as we do not want that, as we want onlyHarmony real to us, we laugh at disharmonyand thus destroy our sense of it. And that iswhy we have theatres and other places wherepeople can go and laugh and amuse them-selves; because this life is so strenuous that itwould require a great deal of mental effort tothrow off the disharmony from the mind.There is the easier way--we go and laugh itaway. It seems that if we see somethingfunny we relieve ourselves of the burden.This gift which Nature has given us let usremember to be very careful in using.

26

Last comes LOVE--TO LIVE LOVE, TOMANIFEST LOVE IN OUR LIVES. What doesthat mean? To love is natural to us becauseit is a basic Law of Nature. There is no oneon Earth who does not love somebody or atleast something. There is the miser; he lovesgold. He is supposed to be one of the mostdespicable of beings, yet he loves; only heloves a metal. It is a precious metal, a noblemetal, and he therefore loves it. Some dayhe may love an animal, a still higher conceptof Love; and finally he will love a humanbeing; and again there are the various gradesof human beings for him to love, always rais-ing him higher and higher. Even the manwho goes and steals something, who goes andkills somebody, why does he do it? Out oflove for something. He wants to get thatwhich is dear to him. That is a mis-applica-tion of Love, for the perversion of which hewill some day pay the penalty, but still it hasLove latent in it. Therefore, wherever wego we shall never fail to find people lovingsomething or somebody. But to love com-pletely, to demonstrate Love in our lives, ismuch more than that. It means that WESHOULD ALWAYS TRY TO FEEL LOVING TOOUR FELLOW MEN, TO EXPRESS OURLOVE-NATURE EVERY INSTANT AS MUCHAS WE CAN."GIVE TO THE STRANGER THE RICH-NESS OF THY SMILE" is the gentle appeal ofLove. What does it mean? It means thatwe should give even to the stranger, whom

27

we do not know, expressions of love. We alltry to do our measure of good for our fellowbeings, yet very often, in little things andthings dear to the human heart, we omitgentleness, a smile. It is not the thing itselfwhich counts, but the way the thing is doneor the way it is given. One can give a little,simple gift with so much love in the way ofgiving that it will appear to be like the great-est treasure; and one can give away with thestroke of the pen a whole fortune, and peoplewould take it because it is a fortune but wouldnot feel the preciousness in it; for it is themotive which counts, the Love in the action."NO MATTER WHAT YOU DO, IF THERE ISNO LOVE IN YOUR HEART TO SUPPORT IT,ALL YOUR SACRIFICE IS IN VAIN," is awonderful and scientific statement found inthe Bible. We may give to the needy themost valuable gifts, yet if there is no Love inwhat we do, all that is in vain. Love is thatwhich, because of its constructive power,makes every service so precious; and that iswhy, especially in these days, we shouldalways try to express the kindness we mayfeel to people. It is a very important thingthat we should not keep Love unmanifested,but should at every opportunity disclose it,show it forth, manifest it, be it in a word,in a smile, in a look or in a handshake."When he or she looks at you, you feel as ifyou have received a precious gift," is a verybeautiful saying among the peasants inRussia. It means that one feels enriched by

28

the simple look of an individual, regardlessof whether it is a man or a woman, for sexdoes not make any difference; but the mereLove, the richness of the look, makes onefeel as if one had received something worth agreat deal. That shows how valuable Loveis. All things can be bought; LOVE IS THEONE THING WHICH CAN NEVER BEBOUGHT. That is why it is really preciousand that is why we should never be ungenerouswith it, because there is always enough for usto give. In fact, the more we give, themore there is to be given. Now that doesnot at all contradict what was said before inexplaining the quadrangle, where Love facesMind. ONE SHOULD NOT SQUANDER LOVEAS A SPECIAL GIFT ON THOSE WHO ARENOT WORTHY BUT SHOULD RADIATE LOVEAS A GENERAL GIFT TO ENEMIES AS TOFRIENDS, ALIKE TO ALL, JUST AS THE SUNSHINES ON THE WICKED AS ON THE GOOD,ON THE PLOWER AS ON THE WEED, ALLTHINGS RECEIVING THE SUN'S RAYSEQUALLY, EVEN IF THEY DO NOT MAKEEQUAL USE OF THEM.

29

THE FIVE STATEMENTSOF BEING

THE SUM OF ALL LIVES THE ONE LIFE, ISTHE GREAT PRINCIPLE. THE ABSOLUTE,

CALLED GOD.THE SUM OF ALL INTELLIGENCES, THE

ONE INTELLIGENCE, IS THE GREATPRINCIPLE, THE ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD.

'I'HE SUM OF ALL TRUTHS, THE ONE'I'RUTH , IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE

ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD.THE SUM OF ALL LOVES, THE ONE

LOVE, IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THEABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD.

THE SUM OF ALL BEINGS, THE ONEBEING, IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE

ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD.

These five scientific statements corre-spond to the five activities as expressed in theword "Principle." The first, to the activityof creating; the second, to the activity ofconstituting; the third, to the activity ofgoverning; the fourth, to the activity ofsustaining; and the fifth, to the activity ofcontaining. They also correspond in thesquare to the four corners and the point,--Life, the Sum of all lives; Mind, the Sum ofall intelligences; Truth, the Sum of all truths;Love, the Sum of all loves; and Spirit, theSum of all beings.

What do they stand for? THE SUM OFALL LIVES, THE ONE LIFE, IS THE GREAT

30

PRINCIPLE, THE ABSOULUTE, CALLED GOD- means that all individual lives (no matterif it is the life of a minute cell in the body, ofa microbe, of an electron, or the life of astar, of a planet, of an individual, or anylife in this Universe, lives small and great)all are bound together, are holding togetheras One Great Whole, like the drops of waterholding together and forming the ocean.All these lives are One Great Life, as all thedrops of water are one ocean, and that is theAbsolute; and whenever we realize that weare a part of that One Life, we have then allthe benefit of all the Forces and the Eternityof the One Life. But whenever we feelseparate from that Life, then we lose ourstrength, and are at the mercy of circum-stances, of fate; just as a little drop of waterwhich is thrown out of the ocean and liesthere alone on the sand, disappears becauseit is a separate unit, but which, when it isone with the ocean, has all the power of theocean to sustain it. So it is with us. Whenwe realize that we are one with that GreatLife, one with the ABSOLUTE. the GreatPrinciple, then we are strong, then we arewhat WE REALLY ARE; but if we think weare separate, we are weak, because we areleft alone. That is so, not because we havebeen told that it is so, but because it is aLaw; and when analyzed by Science, thoselives taken together are found to be reallyONE UNIVERSAL, ETERNAL LIFE.

31

What does it mean, THE SUM OF ALLINTELLIGENCES, THE ONE INTELLI-GENCE, IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THEABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD? It means thatall intelligences throughout the wholeUniverse, all thoughts, the creative intellectof the genius, and the little mentality of acell in the body, that has only enough senseto do its proper duty so as to work for us au-tomatically, taking all of them as One GreatWhole, make THAT ONE INTELLIGENCEWHICH WE GALL COSMIC MIND, THESELF-CONCIOUSNESS OF THE UNIVERSE.And whenever we feel one with thatCosmic Mind, we can draw all the knowl-edge there is from that Consciousness, andwe Know; we can know all without studying,without the process even of reasoning. Wedo not need to go from one point to another,for we are then comprehensive and includeall points. We have the Whole before us andwe are a part of the Whole. Again like adrop, one with the ocean it is strong, out-side it is weak. It is not because we like itor believe it to be so, but because IT IS THELAW. ALL IS ONE INTELLIGENCE AND WEARE PART OF IT.

THE SUM OF ALL TRUTHS, THE ONE'I'RUTH, IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THEABSOLUTE, CALLED COD. That meansthat everything which REALLY IS fromEternity unto Eternity, every Law, nomatter if it is a little law or if it is a Universal

32

Law, every Truth ever thought or spoken,make ONE GREAT ALL, ONE UNIVERSALTRUTH-AND WE ARE PART OF IT. When-ever then we realize that ONE-NESS with theGreat Truth and stand for that Truth andlive It, we have the whole of the Truth ofthe Universe back of us, because we arepart of It, as a drop is part of the Ocean.The drop may be on the top of the wave; itis not the force of the drop which makes itrise, it is the force of the wave, and the waveis a part of the ocean. So are we. When westand for Truth we know that we are onewith the Great Truth. We have thenirresistible and invincible Power with usbecause the Great Principle----God----is thatOne Truth.

THE SUM OF ALL LOVES, THE ONELOVE, IS THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THEABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD. What does itmean? It means every affection, everyfervent emotion, every loving thought,word, look or deed-all these loves, be it thelove which makes worlds vibrate, or thelittle unconscious love of two chemicals, putin the presence of one another and combiningbecause they are mutually attracted lovessmall and great, conscious or unconscious,sublime or low, taken together into OneGreat Whole, make THE ONE INFINITE,UNIVERSAL LOVE FOR WHICH NOTHINGIS TOO GREAT. Whenever we love unselfish-ly, not from our own personal little self, but

33

from the Great Self, then that Ocean ofInfinite Power and Harmony is immediatelybehind us in its GREATEST, MOST BEAUTI-FUL MANIFESTATION OF LOVE-the mani-festation which is last and yet is first becauseit is the most important, and because it isTHE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THE ABSOLUTE.Therefore, whenever we love unselfishly andmanifest that Love, the whole of theUniverse's Love stands behind us, andTHERE IS NO GREATER POWER ON EARTHOR IN HEAVEN THAN THAT.And finally, THE SUM ALL BEINGS,THE ONE BEING IS THE GREATPRINCIPLE, THE ABSOLUTE, CALLED GOD.What does that mean? It means that allthe individual beings, whether worlds, stars,planets, human beings, animals, plants,minerals, cells, atoms, electrons-the small-est things everywhere and the biggestthings make ONE, ARE ONE INFINITE,UNIVERSAL BEING, THE BODY OF WHICHIS THE UNIVERSE, THE MIND COSMICINTELLIGENCE, AND THE SOUL INFINITELOVE.Taken all together with their bodies,minds, and souls, holding together throughthe indissoluble Force of Attraction, yetretaining their eternal identities, movingfreely in their own individual orbits, attractedone to another by the Law of Attraction,working throughout the Universe, THEYCONSTITUTE ONE GREAT BEING, just aseach cell of our body, attracted to other

34

cells, form this very body of ours. The bodyis made up of minute individual cells andyet it is a complete whole, which is strongand has its own powers. So it is with thatOne Great Being. It is made up of all of us;we are an eternal part of it; and THAT BEINGIS CALLED THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THEABSOLUTE, OR GOD.Now the question may be asked, why arethere five words which scientifically definethe word "Principle," and not six or four orseven? Why does the Great Principle expressitself in the four aspects of Life, Mind,Truth, and Love, culminating in the fifthaspect, Spirit? Why are there five State-ments of Being, and not a lesser or greaternumber? Because we are living now in theFifth Period of Humanity's evolution,represented allegorically in the Bible as theFifth Day of Creation. The evolutionarynumber of this age being FIVE, that numberis now continually expressed throughout thematerial and mental planes. That is whywe have five senses, five extremities, fivefingers, etc. The present human race (theFifth Race) embraces five distinct types, thewhite, yellow, red, brown and black. Thisplanet itself is geographically divided intofive major parts. The Pentagram, or fivepointed star, is the emblem of the Humanityof today. Instances of this sort can be citedindefinitely. Even human inventions expresscontinually the number Five, or the FifthDay of Creation. We read in the Bible that

35

on the fifth day were created great whales,fish, birds, and all creeping things. Whathas the human mind brought forth today asmechanical inventions? Our gigantic steam-ers correspond to great whales, our sub-marines to fish, our airships and airplanes tobirds, our trains, automobiles, etc., tocreeping things. The inventive genius ofHumanity bears the seal of the Fifth Periodof our evolution. Most human beings of thisage are, in mental or emotional develop-ment, creeping things, or at their best onlybirds. In our present state of consciousnesswe cannot even imagine the transcendentpower, intelligence, and glory which will beours when Humanity will reach the end of theSixth Period of Evolution, that Sixth Dayof Creation, when, according to Biblicalallegory, Divinity created Man in Its ownImage and Likeness, and gave him dominionover all. When Man, through self knowl-edge and development of his inner latentqualities and powers, will be revealed tohimself as he really is, the Son of God, theWitness of the Absolute, the Perfect Mani-festation of the Great All, he will reach agreatness which passes all understanding.And this task of self development is theIMMEDIATE AND MOST IMPORTANT PROB-LEM OF HUMANITY.

36

THE THREE ATTRIBUTESOF THE ABSOLUTE ARE:

OMNIPRESENCE, OMNISCIENCE,OMNIPOTENCE.

Theological teachings state that Divinityhas three distinct attributes, Omnipresence,Omniscience and Omnipotence. That is, theGreat Principle, the Absolute, is omni-present, omniscient and omnipotent.What is Omnipresence? The GreatPrinciple has from Eternity, out of Itself,cre-ated everything there is. It is Its Own Centerand Its Own Circumference. The Absolute,the Great All, is present everywhere,whether we are conscious of It or not. Thatmeans that whenever we wish to come incontact with the Great Principle, we do notneed to think about something far distant,unattainable. All we need to do is TO KNOWTHE IMMUTABLE FACT that Its first mani-festation, Universal Energy, is always aboutus in its full power. It is closer to us thanour own skin, which is in fact a part of it.Therefore, when anyone realizes that Pres-ence consciously, THERE IT IS IN ITS FIJLLPOWER. We again can make the comparisonwith the ocean. We cannot say that in anyone place in the ocean there is more powerthan in another. There is power every-where. Whenever one wishes to contact thequalities and powers of the ocean, one hassimply to dip the hand into the water and onewill feel all that the ocean is; and if one putsthe hand in another part of the ocean, onewill have the same result. Millions of peoplecan do the same thing, at the same time, inmillions of different places, and they all willcontact the same fullness of the ocean. So itis with the Great Principle. Whenever weconsciously contact the Absolute in Its mani-festation as Universal Energy, THERE IT ISIN ALL ITS OMNIPOTENCE because It is allembracing. Therefore, it is not correct, aswe very often find in literature, to imagine

37

that there is somewhere in the Universe aCenter of Powers and Forces from which allForces radiate, acting most strongly uponthose things which are nearest, and morefeebly upon those farthest away. WE CANALWAYS RECEIVE EVERYTHING HEREAND NOW, ONLY WE MUST BECOME CON-SCIOUS OF IT. It is our own unbelief, ourfear, which prevents the Law from manifest-ing it. There are ways to overcome theseunbeliefs, these fears, and they will beshown and explained in the following lessons.As the Great Principle is all-inclusive, Itcontains naturally all essentials of knowledge.Therefore, whenever we contact It in ItsAspect of Universal Energy we at the sametime come in touch also with Its Aspect ofCosmic Mind, thus receiving all knowledge,all wisdom, because, as the Absolute em-braces in Itself all there is, all knowledgewhich is in It must be there for us to contact,and thus to receive.The natural result of Omniscience isOmnipotence, because WHEN WE KNOW,

38

WE CAN. We usually cannot do things onlybecause we do not know how. Knowledgegives us the possibility to achieve; and since,therefore, Omnipotence is the direct result ofOmniscience, whenever we contact Omni-science, logically, we inevitably achieveOmnipotence. That means, through THEREALIZATION OF THE ABSOLUTE HERENEAR US, CLOSE AT HAND, WE IDENTIFYOURSELVES WITH ALL ITS POWERS. Thereis nothing closer to us than the GreatPrinciple, because out of Its Own Self has Itcreated us and IN IT WE LIVE, MOVE ANDHAVE OUR BEING. It is within us and with-out us. Like a soap bubble, where there isair within and air without and a tiny film sep-arating the two, so are we—THE ABSOLUTEWITHIN. THE ABSOLUTE WITHOUT.and nothing but a little film (our presentstate of consciousness) which separates thetwo for the time being; and some day eventhat tiny film will dissolve, and will be foundno more.

TRINITY

This subject must be also approachedfrom the side of Religion or Philosophy, yetit is Science which will explain now thisfundamental theological point.The idea of Trinity is a very ancient one.As far as we can go, through scientificinvestigation, we find in the most ancient

39

religions this idea of Trinity.. We shallanalyze now three different kinds of Trinitiesin the most important religions, becausethey stand for three distinct conceptions.

The first Trinity, the Egyptian Trinity,-OSIRIS THE FATHER, ISIS THE MOTHER,HORUS THE SUN. Leaving aside the occultsignificance, there will be given here thedirect and simple meaning of this Trinity.It means the Male principle, the Father;the Female principle, the Mother; and bythe fusion of the Two, the Offspring, theChild. It is what we see in Nature every-where. It is called the Natural Trinity orthe Trinity of Nature. It is a Trinity, but itis in a way a primitive Trinity.

Second comes the Brahmic Hindu Trin-ity, called "Trimurti"- BRAHMA THEFATHER, VISHNU THE SUN, SIVA THEOTHER SON. This Trinity means somethingentirely different. There is the Father, theOne from whom all things have originated,the Eternally Unmanifest, and there arethe two manifestations, the two Sons. Thereis no Mother. THE PATHER AND THEMOTHER ARE ONE. Out of the fusion ofTwo in One were brought forth Twins andthese Twins are Vishnu and Siva. Vishnuthe Law Giver, the Preserver; Siva theDestroyer and Regenerator. Translated intoChristian terminology Vishnu, the preserver,the lover, would be Christ, LOVE; and Siva,

40

the destroyer and regenerator, Lucifer,MIND. Mind, through his own mistakes,due to Pride, at first destroys his very life,but having REALIZED HIS MISDIRECTIONstarts to regenerate it, to rebuild it on aright basis. MIND, WHEN MISAPPLIED,DEBASES LIFE; PROPERLY USED, EXALTSIT. In the lesson on Mind Force will beexplained in detail the destructive as well asconstructive activities of Mind.What is the nature of Siva? In the Hindumythology He stands for the destroyer andregenerator, and is therefore usually repre-sented as destroying and at the same timecreating life. There are the two Sons of God,who were both perfect once, but of whom onehas fallen. Lucifer has fallen and becomeSatan, the Evil One, the one who claimed hispower as separate from God; but in theBrahmic (Hindu) religion, he is still wor-shipped because he is of divine origin and aSon of God.There is a very deep idea hidden in thisworship of Siva. His worshippers perceivewithin him the Divine Self, Perfect Intelli-gence; and even if he appears now to humanconsciousness as the Destroyer, the one to befeared (to be worshipped with fear) yet thispresent state is but a transitory condition,nothing but a dream, the veil of Matter,Maya, the Great Illusion. But some day theradiant Past will reappear in a still moreglorious Future, when Siva and Vishnu willagain be One in their Father-Mother,

41

Brahma, MIND HAVING LEARNED THELESSON OF LOVE AND BEING THUS RE-UNITED WITH HIS TWIN, HIS ETERNALMATE, DIVINE LOVE. That is the Brahmicconcept of the Trinity. It is an entirelydifferent conception from the old EgyptianTrinity.

Last comes the Christian Trinity-GODTHE FATHER, TIIB SON, AND THE HOLYGHOST. This Trinity is the latest revelationto Humanity of the Absolute. In our presentstate of consciousness we cannot imagineanything more ideal than this Trinity, yet ithas only one Father, one Son and one HolyGhost, of Whom it is said the Three are Oneand yet are Three, God the Father, God theSon, and God the holy Ghost. The ordinaryexplanation is that there is God, called theFather, the Son called Christ, and the HolyGhost, the Spirit, emanating from theFather. The Roman Catholic Church saysthe Holy Ghost emanates also from the Son,and that affirmation of the Catholics "andfrom the Son" (Filioque), introduced intothe Credo of the Western Church in 589A. D. at the Council of Toledo (Spain)caused later on the separation of the Westernand the Eastern Churches. Before that timethe Churches were one; but when the words"AND FROM THE SON" (Filioque) wereadded to that passage in the Credo "TheHoly Ghost proceeds from the Father," theEastern Church, which claimed that it had

42

received the Credo direct from the Apostles,whose teachings say only "from the Father,"refused to accept that addition. Prom thattime the two Churches separated and theyhave remained separate up to the presentday. They are still divided and refuse to bereconciled. The reason why they seeminglycannot be reconciled is because they areseeing the same thing from two differentangles. They feel intuitively that they areboth right, yet appearances seem to showthe reverse. All this seeming disagreementcan be explained away through Science. Ifwe begin to reason from the point of view ofReligion, what the Trinity is, and how it isthat there are Three Persons in One, we cannever come to any logical conclusion. Norcan we ever have a satisfactory explanationof why God Who is God, the Great All, hasonly one Son, the Only Begotten One. Whyis it that human beings can have many sons,and the Infinite God has only one Son? Whyis God, illimitable in other directions, solimited in that direction. He could have hadmore than the one Son we know of. In theBrahmic Hindu Trinity, there are twoSons, and yet in the Christian Trinity thereis only One Son. There is a reason for it.Who is God? Who is the Father? TheFather is that eternally Unmanifest Principle,the First Great Cause, the Absolute. Thatis the Father. Who is the Only Be-gotten Son? It is the Whole Universe, in-cluding Man. THE UNIVERSE AS A WHOLE

43

IS THE ONLY SON OF GOD. God, theUnmanifest, the Great Principle, has nevercreated another Universe, because fromEternity He has evolved it out of Himselfand made it His exact counterpart. THEPROOF OF DIVINITY EXISTS. HIS ONLYCHILD, HIS WITNESS, IS THE UNIVERSE,INCLUDING MAN, and Christ is the idealMan. The Universe is the Absolute mademanifest; therefore IT IS OF DIVINE ORIGIN,COEXISTENT, COETERNAL, AND CO-EQUAL WITH THE FATHER.Who is the Holy Ghost? The HolyGhost is that all pervading and sustainingForce expressed in the word "Principle," ASSUSTAINING POWER, which continuallyflows from the Father to the Son, from theUnmanifest, the Great Principle, to ItsManifestation, the Universe. That power,which conveys Life, Intelligence, Truth andLove to the Worlds? from Eternity to Etern-ity, is the Holy Ghost who proceeds fromthe Father and goes to the Son; and theseThree are logically One. They cannot beseparated. As the five activities of the word"Principle" cannot be separated, so theThree the Unmanifest Great Principle, theFather, the Manifested Universe, the Son,and the Conscious, Loving Life Force, theSustaining Power, the Holy Ghost-cannotbe separated. THEY ARE ONE and yet theyare distinctly THREE. Therefore the EasternChurch, which says the Holy Ghost pro-ceeds from the Father to the Son, is right.

44

Yet the Roman Catholics are also right,because after the Holy Ghost, the IntelligentLoving Life Force, has proceeded from theUnmanifest, the Absolute, the Father, toIts Manifestation, the Universe, the Son, Itdoes not remain there. It has to go back tothe Father, because the Father is the All-Inclusive Great All. If the Holy Ghost werenot to return from the Son to the Father, thecycle would be incomplete; yet the cyclemust be completed because there is no otherplace for It to go (the Father being All) ex-cept to return to Its First Cause, the Father.There is a continual going forth, and return-ing to Its Own Origin, of that Eternal, Con-scious, Loving Force called the Holy Ghost.Therefore THE HOLY GHOST PROCEEDSALSO FROM THE SON, and the RomanCatholics are right as well as the GreekCatholics, the Greek Church seeing oneside of the Eternal Fact and the Catholicsseeing the other side also.

We are all looking for Divinity, the GreatPrinciple, the Absolute; we are seeking Itsomewhere far away and yet we do not real-ize that WE LIVE ALL THE TIME IN THECLOSEST CONTACT WITH THE GREAT ALL,AS WE ARE A PART OF IT. In the whole ofNature, in everything, in everyone, there isthe Great Principle, Divinity, continuallyin Its three Aspects, in the Unmanifest bywhat we feel, in the Manifested Aspect bywhat we perceive, and in Its Third Aspect

45

by what we know. Therefore the Absoluteis always present in Its full force even thoughwe are unconscious of Its presence. Wecannot evade It; wherever we go, there is theGreat All. When we contact nothing butair, there It is. Even the Ether is a mani-festation of It. Whenever we are withhuman beings there we contact the GreatPrinciple in Its highest Aspect on Earth,because EACH HUMAN BEING IS THE SONOF GOD, IS THE MOST TANGIBLE MANI-FESTATION OF DIVINITY, IS A POINT INWHICH ALL ITS FORCES AND POWERS AREFOCUSED. Therefore whenever we are withhuman beings we must remember we are notaway from the Absolute; we are in the midstof the Great Spirit manifested in body; weare in Divine company; and that is why,especially when we look into the eyes ofpeople, we see something divine in theireyes, because THROUGH THE EYES OF MANWE SEE GOD, Who looks at us through thosewindows of the Soul. Jesus said, "Whoeverhas seen me has seen the Father." And Hetold an absolute truth. He made a scientificstatement, because in His clear eyes theycould see His Father, God Himself. Throughall our eyes, through the eyes of each indi-vidual, we can see God shining. When anindividual smiles with the eyes, tenderly,sincerely, the look is so precious, is sowonderful, because IT IS DIVINITY SMIL-ING. That is why people, when they love,look into each others eyes; they are never

46

tired of doing it, for how can one be evertired of looking at Divinity? The emotion ofLove is for us the key which opens the gatesof Heaven. In reality we do not love humanbeings; we think we do. We love Divinitythrough human beings. We have that long-ing and yearning within us to go back to theFather, to the Absolute, and whenever wefind a channel through which we can achievethat return to Him, a channel opened byLove, we are only too glad to use it, becauseit is the inmost desire of our heart, it is thelove of our Soul. The Great Principle ismanifest everywhere and everywhere un-manifest; and therefore Heaven, Harmony,is not far away in unknown regions; it isalways about us, IT IS OUR PRIVILEGEAND DUTY TO DISCOVER IT, NOW ANDHERE. For this reason Jesus said that to"Love God with all one's strength, and toLove one's neighbor as one's self," are thetwo greatest commandments. He knew thatIP WE LOVE IN THAT WAY, WE FULFILAN ETERNAL LAW, WE BECOME ONE WITHTILE GREAT PRINCIPLE: we have thenreached absolute Unity with It, because wehave united ourselves with Divinity in bothAspects, the Unmanifest and the Manifest.

47

SCIENTIFIC DEFINITIONOF MAN

MAN IS THE INDIVIDUALIZED PROJEC-TION OF THE GREAT PRINCIPLE INTO ITSOWN ETERNAL SUBSTANCE. PROCEED-ING FROM THE GREAT PRINCIPLE ANDINDISSOLUBLY CONNECTED WITH IT,MANIFESTING ALL ITS QUALITIES ANDPOWERS, MAN IS INDEED THE IMAGEAND LIKENESS OF THE ABSOLUTE. HE ISCOEXISTENT AND COETERNAL WITH HISFATHER, THE GREAT PRINCIPLE. TOKNOW MAN IN THE PRESENT STATE OFHUMAN CONSCIOUSNESS IS AS GREAT APROBLEM AS TO KNOW THE ABSOLUTEITSELF. MAN SEES MAN AS THROUGH ADARK CLOUD; VEILED. BUT WHEN MANWILL BE REVEALED TO HIMSELF AS HEREALLY IS, THE WITNESS OF THE GREATALL, THAT DAY THE MYSTERY OF GODWILL BE SOLVED, BECAUSE MAN FACINGHIS OWN REAL SELF WILL THUS FACEGOD.

48

LESSON ONE1. QUES. What is the subject of the first

lesson?ANS. A Scientific Explanation of the

Great AII,and Man's relation to it,2. QUES. What are the causes of the Great

All?ANS. There is but one Causeless Cause,

called the Eternally Unmanifest,the Absolute.

3. QUES. What is Primal Energy? Wheredid it originate?

ANS. Primal Energy is the first mani-festation of the Unmanifest,called God.

4. QUES. Is Primal Energy limited inSpace, Time, or Power?

ANS. No. It is filling all Space, is all-pervading, and therefore infinite.It endures through All Time, andis therefore eternal. It includesall Forces, and is therefore all-powerful.

5. QUES. What are the basic qualities ofPrimal Energy?

ANS. Motion and Attraction.6. QUES. How many kinds of movements

are there in Motion?ANS. Two kinds, the rotary and the

propulsory movements.7. QUES. What word expresses most com-

pletely the nature and activity ofthe Absolute?

ANS. The word "Principle."

49

8. QUES. What is the scientific definition ofthe word "Principle?"

ANS. Principle is that which creates,constitutes, governs, sustains andcontains all.

9. QUES. Who is the "Great Principle?"ANS. The Causeless Cause, the Un-

manifest, the Absolute calledGod.

10. QUES. What are the Aspects of theGreat Principle in the presentstate of human consciousness?

ANS. They are Life, Mind, Truth(Law) and Love which, taken alltogether, culminate in Spirit.

11. QUES. What is the relation of thoseAspects of the Great Principleto the scientific definition of It?

ANS. Life creates all. Mind constitutesall. Truth (Law) governs all.Love sustains all. Spirit con-tains all.

12. QUES. Are those Aspects simultaneousand instantaneous?

ANS. Yes, they are, though kept in acertain logical order which cannotbe changed.

13. QUES. What geometrical figures do theyform?

ANS. A Square and a Pyramid.14. QUES. What do those two figures mean?

ANS. Perfection, Harmony and Power.15. QUES. What are the four corners of the

Square?

50

ANS. Life, Mind ,Truth (Law) and Love.16. QUES. What are the two greatest powers

of today?ANS. Mind and Love.

17. QUES. What do they represent?ANS. Mind represents Lucifer fallen

from his high estate, waiting forredemption. Love representsChrist.

18. QUES. Can Lucifer( Mind) be redeemed?ANS. Yes, through Christ(Love).

19. QUES. What are their relations tohuman beings?

ANS. They are the two fundamentalelements, the two poles in eachhuman being.

20. QUES. How is the Pyramid formed?ANS. By simultaneously erecting the

four corners of the Square (Life,Mind, Truth, and Love) to aconvergent central point, whichis Spirit.

21. QUES. What relations have the Squareand the Pyramid of Life tohuman beings?

ANS. The first is the foundation. Thelatter is the working out of thehuman character.

22. QUES. How is that achieved?ANS. By performing all actions ener-

getically, intelligently, accuratelyand joyfully.

23. QUES. What does it mean to live Lifecorrectly?

51

ANS. It means to perform one's dutiesalways at the right time.

24. QUES. What does it mean, to live Lifeintelligently?

ANS. It means always to keep a propersense of values, to take the essen-tial,leaving the non-essential to itsproper place. Above all, it meansnot to lose oneself in details.

25. QUES. What does it mean, to live a lifeof Truth?

ANS. It means to be always truthful toone s own self, in feeling, inthought, in word, and in deed.

26. QUES. What does it mean, to manifestLove in one's life, to live lovingly?

ANS. It means to give always, to every-body, under all circumstances,the radiance of one's Love.

27. QUES. What practical result is obtainedin living according to the fourprinciples of the Square?

ANS. Spirit that is, all freedom, allharmony, all power is reached.

28. QUES. How many Statements of Beingare there in the present state ofhuman consciousness?

ANS. There are five:The sum of all livesThe sum of all in-intelligencesThe sum of all truthsThe sum of all lovesThe sum of all beings

Is theGreat

Principle,the

Absolute,calledGod.

29. QUES. What do they mean?ANS. They mean the Oneness of the

Great Principle, the Great All.30. QUES. What is Man's relation to the

Great Principle, according tothose five Statements of Being?

ANS. Man is an integral part of theGreat Principle, of that GreatAll called God, described in those

52

five Statements of Being. Aslong as Man realizes his actualOneness with that Ocean ofForce, Knowledge, Truth andLove, he has power; once apartfrom it, he is without power.

31. QUES. Can Man's relation to the GreatPrinciple ever be actually broken?

ANS. No, it can not, though Man maybecome unconscious of it, thusseemingly breaking away fromthe Great Principle.

32. QUES. Why are there FIVE words whichdefine "Principle," FIVE aspectsof the Great Principle, FIVEStatements of Being, FIVE senses,FIVE fingers, etc.? Why is thenumber FIVE everywhere sodominant?

ANS. Because Humanity is now livingin the Fifth Period of its evolu-tion, allegorically referred to inthe Bible as the Fifth Day ofCreation. For that reason alsois the five-pointed star con-

53

sidered the emblem of theHumanity of today.

33. QUES. What are the three attributes ofthe Great Principle?

ANS. They are Omnipresence, Omni-science, and Omnipotence.

31. QUES. What is the practical value ofthose attributes to human beings?

ANS. In realizing Man's Oneness withthe Great Principle, all Force,all Knowledge, all Power can beactually demonstrated in dailylife.

35. QUES. What does the word "Trinity"mean?

ANS. It means Tri-unity, or three inOne.

36. QUES. What are the three main con-cepts of the Trinity?

ANS. 1. The Egyptian: Osiris theFather, Isis the Mother, andHorus the Son. (The Trinityof the Life Plane.)

2. The Hindu: Brahma theFather-Mother, and two Sons,Vishnu and Siva. (The Trin-ity of the Mind Plane.)

3. The Christian: God the Father,God the Son, and God theHoly Ghost. (The Trinity ofthe Soul Plane.)

37. QUES. Which of these concepts of theTrinity is most important?

ANS. The Christian concept, because it

54

is the latest revelation of Truth toHumanity.

38. QUES. What does the Christian Trinitymean?

ANS. God the Father is the EternallyUnmanifest, the Great Principle,the Absolute. The Son is Its Eter-nal Manifestation, the Universe,the Only Child ever begottenof God, coexistent, coequal,and coeternal with the Father.The Universe is the actual proofof the existence of God. TheHoly Ghost is the Force of Life,of Intelligence, of Truth (Law),and of Love, eternally proceedingfrom the Father, the GreatPrinciple, to the Son, theUniverse, and returning from theSon to the Father.

39. QUES. Where is the Great Principle?ANS. Everywhere.

40. QUES. Can one love God, the GreatPrinciple, without first lovingMan, animals, and Nature ingeneral?

ANS. No. Everything in Nature is anexpression of the Great Principle,and no man can love that whichhe has not seen before lovingthat which he has seen.

41. QUES. What are animals, plants, min-erals, etc., and what is theirrelation to Man?

55

ANS. They are also perfect and eternalmanifestations of the GreatPrinciple, Man's younger broth-ers, who must obey Man andwhom Man must govern andprotect with love.

42. QUES. What is Man?ANS. Man is the highest known Mani-

festation of the Unmanifest, theImage and Likeness of God, theWitness of the Absolute. He isperfect, coexistent and coeternalwith his Father, the GreatPrinciple.

43. QUES. How can one know God?ANS. By knowing one's own True Self.

41. QUES. Are the terms, "the CauselessCause, the Unmanifest, theAbsolute, the Great Principle,God," synonymous?

ANS. Yes, they are.

56

57

58

59

thing, fills all Space, endures throughoutEternity, and is the Source of all power. Itis indeed the very Life of the Universe. Assuch, it is in perpetual motion, expressingitself through what are called vibrations.

IN THE ABSOLUTE THERE IS ONLY ONEKIND OF VIBRATIONS, THE SPIRITUAL. INTHE PRESEN'I' STATE OF HUMAN CON-SCIOUSNESS THOSE SPIRITUAL VIBRA-TIONS APPEAR AS A THREE FOLD RAY-

1. LIFE VIBRATIONS (MAGNETIC)

RIMAL Energy, as was ex-plained in the first lesson, isthe Fundamental Force of theUniverse. It underlies, per-vades, and sustains every-

60

2. MIND VIBRATIONS (MENTAL)3. SOUL VIBRATIONS (SPIRITUAL)

The present state of human consciousness,called THE TRIUNE STATE, acts like aprism through which we see those SPIPITUAI.VIBRATIONS divided into three distinctrays, according to three planes, the physical,the mental, and the Spiritual. And eachkind of vibration is expressing itself in adifferent way, which conforms to its ownparticular laws. Yet they all come from, andreturn to, the same Source, and have oneUNIVERSAL LAW, called the Great Law,underlying all the other individual lawswhich govern them. Just as the prismaticlens splits into its component colors thewhite ray of the sun, so does the prism ofour Triune State of consciousness resolvethe Universal Spiritual Vibrations into theirthree primary aspects.Life, or Magnetic Vibrations, and Mind,or Mental Vibrations, can be readily demon-strated by us at any time. Life Vibrations,being the immediate object of our under-standing, are naturally the easiest to dealwith, as they belong to the physical planeon which we now live. Mind Vibrations aremore difficult to handle, because we do notlive completely on the mental plane. Theproof that we do not yet live completely onthe mental plane is that our thoughts mustall be translated into material form in orderto become tangible to our senses. As towhat concerns the Spiritual Vibrations, only

61

on rare occasions do we consciously contactthem. Seldom do we perceive the Spiritnow, though we are unconsciously in directand constant relation with It. In the sixthlesson will be explained the science of MentalVibrations, and in the seventh lesson how toreach the highest, the Spiritual ones.Life Vibrations are also called MagneticVibrations, because they possess that funda-mental quality of Attraction. In the firstlesson, when describing Primal Energy, itwas stated that it possesses two primaryqualities, Motion and Attraction. In thepractical application of Magnetic Vibra-tions, those qualities are continually used inorder to obtain the desired constructiveresults. Magnetic Vibrations are essentiallyimportant because they not only permeatethe whole Universe and underlie everything,but because they constitute the very elementout of which our bodies and the whole visibleUniverse is made. The great practical valueof those Life Vibrations is that we do notneed concentration or strong mental effortto contact them. All we need to do is tobecome conscious of their continual flow intous, and thus establish the so-called contact.No matter what we do, be it a physical,mental, or emotional activity, we shouldnever use our own very limited supply oflife energy. This must be the cardinal pointalways to be remembered. We should alwaystake the trouble to make the contact withthe Universal Reservoir of that Force, and

62

then the more we use it, the more we have,because it is the everlasting Fount of Lifewhich always gives us more than we canreceive. The question may arise, why is itnecessary to make that contact with theUniversal Life Energy? Are we not indirect and constant communication with itat all times? Yes, we are, but we are notconscious of it. On the contrary, we con-sciously believe that we are independent ofit, that we have a life force of our own. Wethink we are separated from ALL POWER,and "as a man thinketh in his heart, so is he."Therefore we need to re-establish on themental plane that which was lost there,though actually we have never lost that con-tact on the Spiritual plane. Spirit KNOWSthat contact to be an eternal fact. On thephysical plane one it. But mind, onthe mental plane on which were producedall the mistakes and errors ever made,because of that original error of seemingseparation from ALL, POWER, believes inseparation, and thus makes it real. As longas we are not conscious of that flow ofUniversal Life Energy through us, we do notderive much benefit from it, even though itis there.There are different methods of contactingPrimal Energy. The easiest and the sim-plest way is through mental contact. Inorder to do it, we must relax as completelyas we can, physically, mentally, andemotionally. And when we feel harmony

63

within us as a result of that relaxation,-thenwe must say to ourselves the following words:"I AM ONE WITH UNIVERSAL LIFEENERGY. IT IS FLOWING THROUGH MENOW. I FEEL IT." Thus we open themental door which separated the life forcewithin us from the Life Energy without.And the force within, because of its inherentquality of Attraction, contacts the Forcefrom without, which then begins to pourinto us with an ever increasing power. Thenthe more we use that Force, the more it issupplied from the Infinite Source. In spite ofthe simplicity of the method, not everybodyis at first able to use it successfully, becauseof the doubt which some people may enter-tain in their hearts of the efficiency of such amental contact. We must also rememberthat on the mental plane we are a law untoourselves. If we believe in a thing, andstate our faith in it, it will be so. But if wedoubt or fear, we ourselves thus prevent itsrealization. In order to overcome that diffi-culty and enable everybody, even the mostskeptical and timid, to make successfullythat conscious contact with the UniversalLife Energy, there is another method whichwill be explained a method of pure physicalcontact, based on the operation of physicallaws. That second method has this advan-tage over the mental one, that it does notrequire any faith in it. It works for thereason that the physical laws are there putinto operation, and the physical contact

64

with the Universal Energy is made, notbecause we think it or want it, but becausewe cannot help it. Obviously, if we alsothink about that Universal Life Energyflowing through us at the moment of physicalcontact with it, it will work all the better.Yet if we do not think at all about it, it stillwill work, because of the aforesaid reasons.That second, the physical method, is basedon a certain exercise, called the "STAREXERCISE." The reason why this postureis called the Star Exercise is because theindividual, when taking it, has to place hisbody in such a position that it will fit intothe five points of a star. The Five PointedStar, the emblem of the Humanity of today,the occult sign of the Fifth Period of Human-ity's evolution, is also called the Pentagram.According to the alchemists of mediaevaltimes, the Pentagram was considered to bethe key to all powers. The Philosopher'sStone, the Elixir of Life, and many otherwonderful things, were supposed to beobtained whenever that sign was properlyused. Yet the alchemists, though perceivingthe truth back of that sign, saw only itsgeometrical form; that is, the dead letter ofit, which had no actual power. The livingforce back of it, the spirit of it, remainedveiled to them. In this Age, the veil islifted, arid the complete truth, spirit andletter, is revealed. And the mysterioussign, the Pentagram, becomes indeed a KEYTO' ALL POWER, as it unlocks and brings

65

forth in Man all his latent powers and forces.It is when the human body takes the positionas shown in the diagrams following that theactual contact of the life energy within ismade with the Universal Life Energy with-out. And a man's physical, mental, andemotional development will be thus stimu-lated by an ever increasing Force. Standingstraight, but relaxed, with legs spread to adegree corresponding to the design, thearms stretched to either side on a level withthe shoulders, and with head erect, thehuman body will fit 'into the five pointedstar. Even the proportions of a normallybuilt body will correspond to the figure ofthe star. The head fits into the upper point,the two arms into the two side points, thetorso into the center, and the legs into thetwo lower points. The palm of the lefthand should be turned up, and that of theright turned down. The whole body mustremain erect, but not tense. The heart,situated on the left side of the human body,is not only the central pumping stationwhich takes in and sends out the bloodthrough the whole body, but is also theapparatus which sucks in and pours outLife Energy. The palm of the left band,turned up, draws in through its complicatednetwork of nerves the Universal Energypresent in the surrounding atmosphere.That drawing action is due to the pumpingactivity of the heart, and the stream of LifeForce pours into the body because of the

66

attraction exercised on it by the inner lifeforce of the body itself. Through the hand,arm, and heart the Life Energy flows to thesolar plexus, whence it is distributed by wayof the spinal nerve throughout the wholebody. A certain amount of it is stored in thesolar plexus. and the surplus sent outthrough the right hand, whose palm is turneddown, It is especially through the fingertips of the right hand that the Force is flow-ing out of the body toward the earth, whichattracts it because of the same Law ofAttraction. Thus is established a current ofUniversal Energy, penetrating from theInfinite Source into the human body, in-vigorating and purifying it, and flowing outof it only to return with ever increasingpower. The left palm, turned up, takes theposition of a receiving hand, and the right,with palm turned down, appears to bless.In fact, this is so. Our left hand receives allblessings from the Infinite, which our being,having assimilated, in its turn gives out asblessings through the right hand. Not onlythrough the left hand does the Life Forcepenetrate into the body; it pours in alsothrough every cell, and very stronglythrough the solar plexus. Yet during theexercise the main current is received asstated above. Shortly after having taken theposition, one begins to feel a certain heavi-ness in the palm of the left hand. It is as if aheavy ball were pressing on the palm. Andone is sensible of a kind of tingling in the

67

finger tips of the right hand. These twodifferent sensations are due to the influx andoutpouring of Life Force. Thus the individ-ual feels that the contact is established.

There are a few more important pointsto be remembered in connection with thatexercise, The best times to perform it arein the morning, immediately after gettingup, before doing anything else, and at nightbefore going to bed. When performed inthe morning, this exercise will stimulateall one's physical, mental, and emotionalactivities, because of the ascending magneticcurrents of the new day, which impregnate

68

their local color in the exercise. In the eve-ning, on the contrary, the same exercise pro-duces an opposite effect. It soothes anddisposes one to sleep, in harmony with allNature, because of the downward curve ofthe local magnetic currents.Three to five minutes is all that is neededto perform the Star Exercise, For beginners,it would be inadvisable to do it longer,because of the very strong inpour of magneticforces. But later on, when the body becomesaccustomed to that inflow of magnetic cur-rents, the duration of the Star Exercise canbe prolonged to fifteen minutes, and theexercise taken more than twice a day. Dur-ing that exercise, one ought to be dressedas lightly as possible, in order to leave thebody free and without pressure on any partof it. A body without any covering is ofcourse the most responsive. The exerciseshould be performed in front of an openwindow, and, if the temperature and circum-stances permit, out of doors. The StarExercise should never be taken immediatelyafter a meal. At least an hour must elapsebetween the two; otherwise a most violentnausea, and sometimes indigestion, mayresult, as the magnetic current has the sameeffect on digestion as an electrical storm hason milk. It curdles the food in process ofdigestion, because of its strong chemicalaction. Deep, rhythmic breathing is veryhelpful in connection with the exercise,because of the stimulating effect of the

69

oxygen. In the beginning, one's arms mayfeel tired in the performance of the exercise.No effort should be used to keep the arms upin their proper position. Let them drop, andlift them again when rested. Otherwise thetension of the muscles and nerves resultingfrom a prolonged forced elevation of thearms will counteract, to a great extent, theflow of the Force through them.The exercise works so automatically thatthere is no imperative need to think aboutthe Force flowing through the body. Itwill flow anyway, because of the Law ofAttraction. There is no necessity of turningthe face north, because the points of thecompass are of no importance to those whouse Universal Energy, which is limitless.The Star Exercise is exceedingly beneficialto children. It stimulates all of their bodies,especially their brain centers, and thoseglands which play such an important rolein their growth and development. It alsoharmonizes their emotional side with therest of their being, and establishes strengthand poise where before was weakness andrestlessness.The Star Exercise ought to become apart of the daily routine for everyone, youngand old, sick or healthy, weak or strong.It is to be carried on regularly through allone's life, to the very end, and the surprisingpositive results will exceed the most sanguineexpectations. It is like watering a plantwith Life Itself, so that it should grow with

70

an ever-increasing vigor. It is indeed Life,in its strongest and purest form, that one isable to contact through the Star Exercise,and use for the greatest unfoldment of one'sbody, mind, and soul. For some time in thebeginning that process of unfoldment maybe rather slow. But one must persevere, andcomplete success will be the reward of that.perseverance.When using Magnetic Vibrations, faithis not necessary. One can do without it.Nevertheless, faith is very helpful. The so-called miraculous healings performed onlarge crowds who come to be cured by someof the Evangelist healers, is one of the easiestthings .to perform. It is much more difficultto heal patients singly. Each person in thecrowd carries within him a certain light offaith, an open channel for the Life Force toflow through. Individually, these do notamount to much, but when counted byhundreds or maybe thousands, they becomea great light, a tremendous power, a broadavenue of faith, over which the MagneticLife Force is then conveyed as well to eachindividual singly as to the whole crowdcollectively. There each person is benefitedby the addition to his own little faith of allthe other faiths present. Naturally theresult thus obtained is usually a greatsuccess.Primal Energy, as was explained in thefirst lesson, has two fundamental qualities,Motion and Attraction. In its aspect of

71

Life Energy, it has also two other qualities.First, it is SELFT GOVERNING, second, it isBASICALLY HARMONIOUS. Like all ele-ments, Life Energy is self-governing. Physic-al laws, expressing themselves through theelements, are back of that self government.For instance, water contained in any vessel,no matter what position that vessel maytake, will always automatically maintain alevel parallel to that of the sea. The air willrush into a vacuum through the mostminute opening. Mercury, when brokeninto small particles, automatically takes theform of spheres, etc. Elements alwayschoose the path of least resistance and seekequilibrium. The quality of self-govern-ment which Life Energy possesses is excep-tionally practicable and valuable, and simpli-fies greatly the use of it. The followingexamples will explain how it works. Supposethere are two individuals, sitting one on theright side, the other on the left side, of theoperator. The one on the right side, forsome reason, feels very cold; the one on theleft, hot. In order to re-establish normalconditions in the two, all the operator needsto do is to make the mental contact withUniversal Life Energy, and then take in eachof his hands a hand of either patient. Thecontact thus established, the Force flowsthrough the operator to his patients. Beingself-governed the Force automatically worksto meet the requirements of the case. In thefirst instance it warms, in the second it cools,

72

thus simultaneously establishing equilibriumin both. Especially in healing does thisquality become invaluable. It does awayalmost entirely with the necessity of knowingthe nature and location of the ailment. Allone needs to do, in magnetic treatment, isto let the Force flow into the patient; andthe Force, being self-governing, will alwaysgo to the spot where it is needed. Forinstance, a patient complains of hearttrouble. The operator sends the MagneticForce into the patient. The Force itself dis-covers in the patient some other unsuspectedand possibly more serious ailments, perhapsin the lungs or kidneys. It will then auto-matically flow more to the lungs or kidneysthan to the heart, because of the greaterneed. That is why everybody, even childrenwho are too young to know the mental lawsoperating in mental healing, can so success-fully use the magnetic current.Primal Energy, being the foundation ofall there is, is by nature perfectly harmoni-ous. Therefore, Life Energy, as its firstaspect, must possess the same inherentquality. That is, it must be basicallyharmonious. It is mind alone which, whenmisdirected, covers that Life Energy with anegative film. But whenever that Force istaken direct from its Infinite Source thereit flows, perfectly harmonious, healing, andconstructive in every way. The magneticcurrent, when flowing from the Infinite,carries with it such a sense of harmony that

73

it harmonizes even the very channel throughwhich it flows-that is the operator-although he may have felt quite inharmoni-ous when starting the treatment. The lastquality gives to the Magnetic Vibrations agreat superiority over the Mental ones,because no successful healing or other workcan be achieved if the thoughts of theoperator are not harmonious at the verystart. The slightest disharmony on theplane of Mind is most destructive to thesubject on which the thought is operating.Most of the physical discomfort is causedby either congestion or lack of magneticforces in certain parts of the body, and needsthe contact with an outside magnetic currentto re-establish equilibrium. For instance, asudden shock makes one's heart contract.Life force is thrown out of it. As a result, onefeels a pain in the heart. Involuntarilyone's hand is pressed to the heart. Themagnetic current of the body, sent out fromthe solar plexus through the hand, fills theheart with its vivifying power. The heartresumes its normal condition, and the pain isgone. Or again, everyone has observed thatwhen one thinks deeply, one unconsciouslyrests one's head upon the hands. Thereason for it is that the brain, when veryactive, either accumulates too much energy,or not enough, in both cases having itsfunctioning impaired. In either instance themagnetic current is required to correct thediscrepancy. Nature sees that it should be

74

done. Instinctively the band is broughtinto contact with the head, and the magneticcurrent, flowing through the band into thebrain, or vice versa, re-establishes there theproper balance. The knowledge of bow tocontact and use the magnetic current istherefore so precious because it enables oneconsciously and scientifically to use thatForce whenever there is need of it. WhatNature makes us do instinctively, we can dowith so much better results if we realizethe Laws back of it and know bow to applythem. All human emotions have the Mag-netic Force back of them, and the way thatForce works through them, being based onLaws, is so scientific, so accurate, that onecan at once determine the kind of emotion,and how it should be met, by the way itexpresses itself. Generally speaking, allemotions, positive and negative, produce, incertain parts of the body which exactlycorrespond to the rate of vibration of eachemotion, an accumulation of the MagneticForce. Such accumulation of Force makesthe individual feel uncomfortable, and heunconsciously seeks de-magnetization bycontacting that part of his body with thepart of another individual's body which willrespond to the rate of vibration of his accu-mulated Magnetic Force. For instancewhen one loves, the emotion of love stimu-lates life currents throughout all the body.Starting from the heart, the magnetic cur-rent by and by permeates all the body, but

75

concentrates especially in certain centers ofit which, through their delicate and complexformation, are more apt to express it.According to a physical law, all vibrationsnaturally rise upwards. That being the case,they rise first from the heart into the head.There they concentrate, especially in theeyes and around the lips. The pupils areenlarged, and the eyes begin to sparkle,sending out magnetic waves which seek theeyes of another individual in order to be de-magnetized. The lips, in their turn, moreand more filled with the Life Force, also un-consciously seek de-inagnetization, whichthey achieve through what is commonlyknown as a "kiss." If the love of the twoindividuals is on the same plane, their lipswill meet, because the magnetic currents are,in both instances, of the same rate, and seek-ing expression through the lips. But if thelove of one individual is more of a mentaltype, his lips will seek de-magnetization,not on the lips of the other individual, buton the forehead, the seat of thinking powers.No other place on the face will do, becausenowhere else could de-magnetization takeplace, on account of the different rate ofvibration. Like attracts like. If one's, loveis of a more adoring kind, the lips, whencharged with magnetic forces, will seek de-magnetization probably on the hands of theother individual, or maybe on the knees,or even at the feet, again on account of likeseeking like. With all other emotions it is

76

the same. In friendship, one's naturaldesire is to shake hands with the individualone loves, or to put the hand on the shoulderor around the waist. There the hand, thepower to achieve, hued with the magneticcurrent, unconsciously seeks dc-magnetiza-tion in another individual's hand. Or whenthe individual feels the emotion of protec-tion, the impulse is to place his hand on theother individual's shoulder in a gesture ofprotection. Almost everyone has observedthat when two individuals quarrel and athird one intervenes, they usually turnagainst him, and he gets from both of themthe negative which he tried to destroy inthem. Why? Because he unconsciously di-verted their mutual negative passion ofhatred and revenge in his direction. Theywere so full of negative vibrations that theyneeded mutual dc-magnetization, whichthey sought in quarreling. A third partyintervening at that moment directs thenegative currents of both toward that newand open channel. Therefore, if one doesnot know how to approach a case like that,it is better to abstain from interference, andlet people settle their own differences asbest they can. All they need in such a caseis dc-magnetization, and after they obtainit they feel more at ease, no matter if theprice they paid for it was some physical,mental, or moral bruises. The pressurewhich they could not bear is gone, and theyfeel at ease again. Those few main instances

77

cited above explain clearly how the magneticcurrent works through our human emotions.All prominent and successful men andwomen of days gone by and of the presenttime, have been consciously or unconsciouslyusing the Magnetic Force in their lives.They possess an extraordinary vitality,which attracts everybody and everything tothem. They have what is called a magneticpersonality. Such a personality, such vital-ity and power, can be developed by everyonethrough the regular use of the Star Exercise,and the continual contact with Life Energy,through the mental method. By and by onebecomes a living magnet, the power of whichis ever increasing, because of its incessant use.The ancient sages and prophets knew agreat deal about that Magnetic Force, andmost of the so-called miracles performed bythem were accomplished by the use of thatForce. Its widest application it had in heal-ing, where Life Energy was used mostsuccessfully to dispel all kinds of physicalailments. T he methods sometimes employedwere very extraordinary, and the followingexamples will give an idea of the resultsobtained. When crossing the Red Sea,Moses, who was well versed in all knowledge,prayed to God-that is, made the mentalcontact with Life Energy--and then extend-ed his hand, holding his rod, toward theRed Sea. The magnetic current flowedthrough his hand and rod with irresistibleforce into the surrounding atmosphere, and

78

there created a great disturbance. As aresult, a strong wind arose and pushed backthe waters of the sea, which was shallowat that particular place, and the Israeliteswalked on the bottom of the sea to the otherside. Once safe across, Moses again madethe contact, stretched forth his rod, anddirecting the Magnetic Force of the Universethrough it, he reestablished normal atmos-pheric conditions. The wind subsided, andthe waters, no longer pushed back by itspressure, resumed their proper position, andincidentally drowned the Egyptians ,who werefollowing them across the bottom of the sea.Elijah, when bringing back to life the sonof the poor widow in whose house he stayed,obviously used no other power than theMagnetic Force. Thrice after having prayed---that is, made the contact with theUniversal Life Energy did he throw him-self on the body of the dead boy, so as tosend from all his body the life current intothe body which was bereft of it. And afterthe third time, the dead boy became alive.Through the use of the magnetic currentdid Jesus still the storm on the GalileanSea. And when He was touched in thethrong by a woman suffering from a bloodissue, I-us words "I felt a virtue coming out ofMe" also showed that it was the magneticcurrent, the Universal Life Energy flowingthrough Him, which did the healing.The magnetic current can be easily con-centrated also in inanimate objects. Those

79

objects can be so charged with MagneticForce that they become themselves dynamiccenters from which the Force is flowing andcarrying its healing vibrations to all thosewho happen to contact them. Thus arescientifically explained those healing proper-ties which some of the so-called miraculousshrines throughout the whole world aresupposed to possess. Either by itself, orthrough conscious direction of it, the Mag-netic Force was concentrated in thoseshrines, and they became real healingmediums. The healings performed by themwere not what one would call faith cures.Of course faith was also an important agent,as it prepared the people to receive the heal-ing. But the healings themselves were per-formed by the Magnetic Force which wasactually emanating from them. It has beenobserved that water especially possesses toan extraordinary degree the faculty of stor-ing in itself a great deal of Magnetic Force,and then giving it out when needed. Thou-sands of years ago that property was knownto the Ancients, especially in Egypt, India,and other Southern countries where water,because of the great heat, is already a strongvivifying agent, and has been used for healingpurposes. Most of their temples had sacredpools, the waters of which were blessed, or,in other words, were magnetized. Thoseseeking relief from their ailments plungedinto those pools, and many of them emergedsound and wholesome. Even in our own day

80

such pools are still in use in India, and thehealing properties of their waters, sometimeseven polluted with all kinds of germs ofinfectious diseases left by those who hadsought relief there, are not thereby impaired.The Magnetic Force in the water is thestronger, and is able to heal in spite of thedeadly germs. One can make some interest-ing experiments oneself in that direction.For instance, magnetize the water of thebath, or that to wash the face, or to drink.That magnetization is called by the Hindus“Pranization," from the Hindu word"Prana," or Life Force. All one needs to dois to make the mental contact with UniversalEnergy while standing in front of the waterto be magnetized, with the hands extendedtoward it and the finger tips pointing directlyto it, and remain in that position for a fewminutes. The Life Energy will flow throughthe hands into the water and will charge itwith Magnetic Force. That water can thenbe used, and the benefit derived from it isconsiderable. Those who suffer from insom-nia can, by the same method, magnetizetheir pillows, sheets, and covers, and enjoya sound, healthy sleep as the result of it.Infinite are the applications for that Force.In the fourth lesson will be given specialdetailed instructions concerning its use indaily life, and in general work.

81

LESSON TWO1. QUES. What are Vibrations?

ANS. Certain oscillatory rhythmicmovements of Primal Energy.

2. QUES. How many kinds of vibrationsare there in the Absolute?

ANS. One kind, the Spiritual Vibra-tions.

3. QUES. How many kinds of vibrationsare there in the present state ofhuman consciousness?

ANS. Three kinds: Magnetic, Mentaland Spiritual.

4. QUES. Why are there three kinds ofvibrations?

ANS. Because of the Triune State ofthe present human consciousness,through which everything is per-ceived as a three-fold ray.

5. QUES. Which vibrations are the easiestto perceive and to handle?

ANS. The Magnetic, or Life Vibrations,because they are the immediateobject of our understanding andare fundamental.

6. QUES. From where do these MagneticVibrations emanate?

ANS. From their Eternal Source, calledUniversal Energy.

7. QUES. Does that mean that MagneticVibrations are also a kind ofSpiritual Vibrations?

ANS. Yes, they are, only of a slowerrate.

82

8. QUES. What are the methods by whichUniversal Life Energy can becontacted?

ANS. Mental and physical methods.9. QUES. What is the formula used for

mental contact?ANS. "I am One with Universal Life

Energy. It is flowing through menow. I feel it."

10. QUES. Why is it necessary to make thecontact with Universal LifeEnergy on the mental plane?

ANS. Because the contact was oncelost on the mental plane andmust therefore be reestablishedon that plane.

11. QUES. Has that contact ever been loston the Spiritual Plane?

ANS. No.12. QUES. What is the physical method of

contacting Universal Life Energy?ANS. The so-called Star Exercise.

13. QUES. What is the Star Exercise?ANS. It is a certain posture, the object

of which is to fill the whole bodyand especially the solar plexuswith Universal Life Energy.

14. QUES. What is the solar plexus andwhere is it located?

ANS. It is a network of nerves, calledsolar because they radiate. It islocated in the dorsal or anteriorpart of the abdomen. It is alsocalled the "abdominal brain."

83

15. QUES. How is the Star Exercise per-formed?

ANS. Stand relaxed, feet spread apart,arms outstretched on a level withthe shoulders, palm and fingertips of right hand turned down-ward, and palm and finger tipsof left hand turned upward,slightly curved, as if to receivethe current of Universal LifeEnergy that will flow quitenoticeably through it into oneand through the solar plexus toany weak part of the body,strengthening the same and flow-ing out through the right hand.

16. QUES. Why is it called the Star Exercise?ANS. Because it is a posture based on

the geometrical figure of thePent-Alpha, or Pentagram, thesymbol of the present FifthRace, the Fifth Day of Creation,the Fifth Period of Humanity'sEvolution.

17. QUES. Should one observe any cardinalpoint such as turning to theEast, or looking toward theNorth Star?

ANS. No. One must not limit oneselfto the Earth's magnetic currents.

18. QUES. Does one need to believe in theactual flow of Universal LifeEnergy during the Star Exercise?

ANS. No. Universal Life Energy flows

84

into the human body in obedienceto physical laws.

19. QUES. Does this Exercise influence every-one alike?

ANS. No. It may cool one and warmanother but it gives to each justwhat is needed, when it is neededand where it is needed.

20. QUES. What are he qualities of UniversalLife Energy?

ANS. It is self-governed and basicallyharmonious.

21. QUES. Has Universal Life Energy someother qualities?

ANS. Yes. It has two fundamentalqualities, referred to in the firstlesson. They are Motion andAttraction.

22. QUES. What is the practical value ofthose qualities of Universal LifeEnergy in daily life?

ANS. Their practical value resides inthe fact that because of thosequalities, Universal Life Energycan be used automatically with-out any special mental concentra-tion or application of will power.Magnetic Vibrations always pro-duce constructive and harmoniousresults, because of their inherentqualities.

23. QUES. How often and for how longshould one perform that StarExercise?

85

ANS. For beginners, twice a day, inthe morning and in the evening,from three to five minutes eachtime and whenever fatigued, butnever too soon after a meal.

24. QUES. Why is the Magnetic Forcewithout evil, constructive andharmonious?

ANS. Because it proceeds as a purestream from its Infinite andEternal Source, Primal Energy.

25. QUES. Can it become evil?ANS. Yes, thought can make it in-

harmonious by clothing it with anegative mental film.

26. QUES. Does the magnetic current attractor repel?

ANS. It attracts, but by using willpower and thought it can be maderepellent.

27. QUES. How do the Magnetic Vibrationsaffect the brain?

ANS. They stimulate all the brain cells,thereby increasing the activitiesof the brain.

28. QUES. How often should one make the.mental contact with UniversalLife Energy?

ANS. As often as there is any sort ofwork to be done, in any activity,physical, mental, or emotional.

29. QUES. What is the practical result offrequent mental contact withUniversal Life Energy?

86

ANS. All work will become easy,because of the increasing capac-ity for manifesting Life Energy.

30. QUES. How can one develop a magneticpersonality?

ANS. By becoming a living magnetthrough continual contact withUniversal Life Energy.

31. QUES. What causes most of the physicaldiscomfort and pain?

ANS. Excessive accumulation or con-gestion of magnetic currents incertain parts of the body.

32. QUES. How can such congestion berelieved?

ANS. By demagnetizing the congestedspot through laying on of hands.

33. QUES. What are emotions?ANS. They are manifestations of Mag-

netic Vibrations of different rateswhich, when accumulated invarious parts of the body, createthere congestions that can berelieved only by demagnetization

87

of that part. Such demagnetiza-tion is achieved through a kiss,a handshake, laying on of hands,kind words, looks, thoughts, etc.Congestions of negative vibra-tions are ignorantly relieved byfist blows, harsh words, looks,thoughts, etc.

34. QUES. What is magnetic chemicaliza-tion?

ANS. It is a reaction following Mag-netic Vibration. Somewhere inthe body of the patient there maybe negative thought-germs, dis-cordant, but almost Unnotice-able because possessed of littlelife force. When the magneticcurrent arouses them they becomealive, inflate to the limit, thenburst. After they burst they areutterly destroyed and the patientis healed.

35. QUES. What is the explanation of suc-cess in life?

ANS. The use of Universal Life Energy.36. QUES. Is it always used consciously?

ANS. No. Sometimes consciously, mosttimes unconsciously.

37. QUES. What power was used to accom-plish most of the miracles in thepast, and is now employed in theso-called "faith cures?"

ANS. The Magnetic Force.38. QUES. Are the terms "Universal Life

88

Energy, Life Force, MagneticForce, Magnetic Current, Mag-netic Vibrations," synonymous?

ANS. YES39. QUES. Why is there more than one term?

ANS. To secure emphasis of one or theother of the qualities implied inthe terms. "Energy" refers topower, "Life" to the quality ofmotion, and "Magnetic" to thequality of attraction, inherent inUniversal Life Energy.

89

90

91

ROM times immemorial,Matter has been a thing ofthe greatest mystery, whichReligion and Philosophy havetried more or less unsuccess-

fully to explain. Most religions of daysgone by and those in use until now, qual-ify Matter as transitory, temporal, con-tra-distinct to the permanency of Spirit.They call it a Veil, Dream, Illusion, Dust,etc. Some religious movements absolutelyrefuse to acknowledge the existence ofMatter. Their teachings are based on itscomplete denial, they call Matter error,evil. Yet religions have never been able toexplain Matter in a satisfactory way. After

92

all it was not their province to do so. It isonly Science especially modern MaterialScience-which has been able to explainwhat Matter really is. Matter is called bythe Hindus "Maya," the "Great Illusion,"Why? Because seemingly we can never takehold of it. As soon as we think that wehave hold of Matter, it eludes us. It is ofall things the most elusive that we know.Matter appears to us usually in three dis-tinct aspects-solid, liquid and gaseousform-due to different rates of vibrations.Certain manifestations of it commonlyassume a solid aspect, such as stones, metals,wood, etc., some a liquid, such as water,mercury, etc., some a gaseous form, such asvapors, air, and different gases; but each ofthese material things may also be obtainedin the two other aspects, if their rate ofvibration is changed. For example, let ustake ice. When a piece of ice is placed in awarm atmosphere, it melts. Thus we havethe first transformation of Matter; from solidit becomes liquid. Ice becomes water. Ifthe temperature is raised to a still furtherdegree, the water evaporates, becomes steam,-another transformation, liquid taking agaseous form. And steam is found to con-sist of molecules of water. Through dis-integration of the molecule of water are dis-covered the atoms of the original gases,Hydrogen and Oxygen, the combination ofwhich, in a certain chemical proportion(H2o) formed that molecule. Now an atom

93

is such a small particle of Matter that itrequires about 500 millions of them placedside by side to cover a linear inch. in break-ing up the atom are finally found electrons.The electron is the smallest division ofMatter which Science has been able toobtain for the time being. The size of anelectron compared to that of an atom is asour Earth in comparison with the wholeSolar System. What is an electron? Anelectron is a tiny sphere which is rotatingwith extraordinary velocity on its own axis,and then revolving at a speed of about 10,000miles per second around another microscopicsphere which acts as a central sun. Theyare kept in that relation by the UniversalLaw of Attraction, just like our planetarysystem in particular and like the Universein general. It is, on a small scale, what wesee there on a large scale. There are positiveand negative electrons. The negative elec-trons are revolving around a central positiveelectron. It is the aggregation of theseelectrons in their revolutions around thecentral electron which constitutes the atom;and the relation of those electrons one toanother, and their number in the atom of theanalyzed element, determines its nature.The greater the number of electrons in anatom of Matter the stronger and heavier isthe material element. The Hydrogen atom,because it consists of one positive electronaround which is revolving one negativeelectron, is accepted by the scientists of

94

today as the standard atomic weight, thisweight being taken as I. The analysis of thenature of the electron shows it to be radio-active, continually releasing Energy. Why?Because ENERGY IS THE BASIS OF THEEIIEGTRON. In other words the electronis made of condensed Energy. Energy isForce. Then what conclusion can be drawn?That the so-called material things are butcondensed Forces, which are the mostimmaterial things that one can imagine.Material Science was therefore able, throughinvestigation, to prove the absolute non-existence of Matter AS MATTER, in thegenerally accepted meaning of that word.It showed that everything is but Forces ofdifferent rates of vibration, in various combi-nations and relations one to another, and indifferent degrees of condensation. Thisevidence is so convincing, because it isscientific and it can be proven. It worksinvariably.For example, the diamond is supposedto be the hardest stone known on Earth.Its hardness is standard; it is ten. Nextcomes the Corundum (Ruby, Sapphire); itshardness is nine. They are both preciousstones because they are made of a great dealof condensed Energy. Sandstone has onlythe hardness of about three. Now if theamount of Energy contained in the diamondwere released, it would be found to exceedthe amount of Energy contained in the samevolume of sandstone in exact proportion as

95

the hardness of the diamond exceeds thatof sandstone. According to calculationsmade by some modern Scientists, calcula-tions based on scientific experiments, thereis enough Energy condensed in one ounceof Matter, which, if suddenly released,would lift all the German ships sunk duringthe Great War from the bottom of the seato the top of Mt. Everest, the highestmountain on Earth. Also, each human beinghas in his little finger enough condensedForce to run for several minutes all the trainsin England, representing many thousandsof horsepower. This shows what tremendouspowers and forces are latent in us, waitingto be manifested and to be made proper useof.There are some metals which are calledprecious, and others which are called com-mon. This is again the same thing. Preciousmetals are precious because they have somuch condensed Energy within them thatthey can resist the disintegrating influenceof the air. Gold is one of the metals whichpossesses this power. Common metals,because they have in themselves less con-densed Energy, cannot resist those influencesas easily as Gold, Platinum, Iridium, Palla-dium and other precious metals, and theyoxidize-that is, disintegrate, die. Theamount of condensed Energy in an elementdetermines its preciousness, its real value.A diamond is precious not only because it isbeautiful and rare, but especially because it

96

has a real value from the point of view of itsabsolute superiority over other elements, onaccount of the greater presence of forces in it.And as it is with precious stones and metals,so it is with human beings. Those individu-als who are called noble because of theirnoble character really express their lifeforces on a higher plane, in stronger, highervibrations than others, and are thereforemore powerful, and consequently morevaluable to Humanity. The word "noble" inthis instance is used in the sense of soulqualities and not as class distinction. It isevident that such investigations by MaterialScience explain Matter completely. Human-ity owes that to the perseverance of thematerial scientists who were not afraid touse their own material means in order todisintegrate the very elements on . whichthey were working. When one knows thelaws which govern the so-called materialphenomena, the present concept of Matteris done away with entirely. That is becauseof the Law and not because of one's affirma-tion that there is no Matter. The negationof Matter will not destroy Matter. Thatis. why the success of mental healing doesnot depend on the negation of Matter, buton something entirely different. There arelaws which are put in operation most of thetime absolutely unconsciously by those whothink that they bring forth results becausethey denied Matter. For example, let ustake electric light. One can for a thousand

97

years deny that it is shining, and still it willshine. But if one knows that there is aswitch, that switch can be turned off andthe light will not shine any more and it willbe dark. There the Physical Law was madeproper use of and it did work to obtain thedesired result.The following scientific definition ofMatter will clearly show what Matter reallyis:

WHAT IS CALLED MATTER IS BUT THECONSCIOUSNESS OF EFFECTS PRODUCEDON THE SENSES BY VARIOUS MANIFESTA-TIONS OF PRIMAL ENERGY. THEREFOREMATTER IS ONLY A STATE OF CONSCIOUS-NESS, THE PRESENT MANNER IN WHICHTHOSE EFFECTS ARE PERCEIVED.This proposition explains Matter com-pletely. What then do we feel, what do wesee, what do we perceive with our senses?Energy, forces, nothing but forces. Vibra-tory waves of Energy striking the sensesproduce certain impressions and those im-pressions we call sensations. When wehave one kind of vibrations we feel it astouch, another kind we see, another wehear, another we smell, or another we taste.We say we perceive the thing materially,but in reality there is nothing material aboutit; it is all vibration.The question may be asked, how has theelectron originated, and why is it a sphere?Primal Universal Energy has two funda-mental qualities, Motion and Attraction.

98

Motion in its turn expresses itself in twodistinct kinds of movement, one the rotary(centripetal) movement, the other, thepropulsory (centrifugal) movement. Thatis seen throughout the whole Universe,therefore also in our own solar system. Thereis this planet, the Earth, rotating on its ownaxis and moving continually forward, butby the Sun's attraction kept circling aroundit. The rotary movement is expressed inthe rotation of the Earth on its own axis.The forward movement is seen in the Earth'srevolutions about the Sun. On a largerscale, our whole solar system turns arounditself, and besides that moves forward atthe speed of about 1,000,000 miles per 24hours towards the constellation of Lyra. Itmoves in a seemingly straight line, but inreality not in a straight line; it revolvesaround a central sun which has not yet beendiscovered by the astronomers, because it isso far away. There is no end to those everincreasing orbits, because the Universe isendless. And when we come down to thesmallest things we find the same Law govern-ing them. The electrons of which the atomis constituted, rotating on their own littleaxes, express the first movement of PrimalEnergy, and in revolving around their tinysun they express the second movement.Now the first rotary movement is a conden-sary one. When individual units of vibra-tions of Primal Energy begin to rotatearound their own little axes, their inherent

99

quality of Attraction makes them condenseinto electrons. These electrons take the formof. spheres, because a sphere is a perfectlybalanced body, which can remain in thatcondition indefinitely, as all its constituentparts are in perfect relation one to another.For that reason physical bodies, in order topersevere in existence, take in Nature thatsimple and lasting form.On that principle is built the wholeUniverse. Out of a nebula which began tomove and condense and revolve around itsown axis, was formed this solar System. Allother systems were formed in the same way;and the little atom and electron are formedaccording to the same law, because there isonly One Universal Law, called the GreatLaw which pervades and governs every-thing in the same way, no matter if it is astar or if it is an electron. The electronsoriginated because of that first movement,the rotary condensary movement of PrimalEnergy. These Laws pervade everythingand are continually operating also in ourown bodies, and the knowledge of themenables us to work out problems in ourlife with mathematical accuracy.Our body is an aggregation of forces indifferent degrees of condensation; thereforeit is a Dynamic Center, of which we are therightful master.

100

THE VISIBLE UNIVERSE IS MADE UPOF INVISIBLE, PRIMAL, ENERGY. THATWHICH IS SEEN IS MADE UP OF THINGSUNSEEN.

Almost everybody knows something aboutexplosives. They are a very good illustra-tion of how seemingly solid material thingsare in reality made of immaterial elements.Take a piece of dynamite. It is hard, hasweight and density, etc. in striking thatpiece of dynamite, energy is used and pro-duces certain vibrations which alter therelations of the atoms within so that thedynamite explodes-that is, some Energy isreleased and we have dynamite trans..formed into gases. It is a chemical reactionwhich takes place by shock. There is noneed to pour any chemical on the dynamitein order to produce an explosion. To strike-that is, to use energy is sufficient.Energy makes the reaction. And what isobtained from that reaction? Perhaps thou-sands of times the volume of the originalpiece of dynamite. It is obtained in gases.It has entirely changed. Compared withthe first thing which was handled, it isseemingly very immaterial. Of course thegases are also "material," as one can weighgases, smell them, etc., yet there is alreadya tremendous change. That shows howMatter, when handled in a certain way,entirely changes its aspect and becomes adifferent thing, so that when it reaches itslast hiding place in Energy, no one can call

101

it "material" any more; it is then PUREFORCE.Everything in this seemingly materialUniverse is but a combination of Forces, incondensed and non-condensed conditions.In other words, the whole Universe is butan Infinite, Dynamic Center, which is, on atremendous scale, the same as our bodiesare on a small scale.

THE GREAT LAW OF ATTRACTIONGOVERNS THE WHOLE UNIVERSE AND ISTHE BASIS OF ETERNAL HARMONY.

When analyzing Primal Energy, it wasexplained that it has a basic quality,Attraction, and that this quality of Attrac-tion makes possible the existence of the wholeUniverse, as everything in this Universeis kept in perfect relation through theLaw of Attraction. Attraction and Loveare synonymous; Love is the emotional namefor Attraction. Because of the Law ofAttraction, all the minute particles in every-thing are holding together and make up awhole. Why have we a body which we cantouch and which has a form? Because of theLaw & Attraction, which is keeping the cellstogether. The same is true of stone or ofanything else. Why do we remain on thesurface of the Earth and are not thrown intoSpace during its rotation around its axis?Because of the Law of Attraction. Why does

102

the Earth revolve around the Sun? Becauseof the Law of Attraction. Without it, theEarth would be lost in Infinite Space. Whydo all the celestial bodies move in such aharmonious way? Because of the Law ofAttraction. This Law of Attraction is aBasic Law, a Fundamental Quality ofPrimal Energy; and here we have an explana-tion of the words in the Bible: "In Him welive and move and have our being." As itwas previously stated, ATTRACTION ANDLOVE ARE SYNONYMOUS. When we lovewe are attracted; when we hate we arerepelled. It is the Law of Attraction whichenables Universal Harmony to remainHarmony, because without Attraction,everything would become chaos, and theUniverse would collapse. It is that Sustain-ing Power referred to in the explanation ofthe word "Principle" which makes it possiblefor the Universe to be eternally existing.

SPACE WHICH SEPERATES THE WORLDSONE PROM ANOTHER DOES NOT ISOLATETHEM. THEY ARE RENT IN PERPETUAL,COMMUNICATION ONE WITH ANOTHERTHROUGH THE GREAT LAW OF ATTRAC-TION WHICH IS EXERCISED INSTANTANE-OUSLY AND ETERNALLY THROUGHOUTALL SPACE AND THIS FORMS INDISSOL-UBLE LINKS BETWEEN THE WORLDS.

First must be explained the difference

103

between the word "WORLD" and the word"UNIVERSE," for there is a great differencebetween these two words. THERE IS BUTONE UNIVERSE. the word itself states it.This one UNIVERSE is made up of infinitenumbers of Worlds.What is called by astronomers a World isall that which can be seen through the tele-scope, and even much more than what canbe actually perceived. All the seemingly in-finite agglomeration of stars, suns, and plan-ets extending in all directions-some ofthese stars being so far away from theEarth that their light takes millions ofyears to reach us, although light speedsthrough Space at a rate of about 186,000miles per second-constitutes this World.Many stars do not exist any more, yet we seethem because their light is reaching us onlynow. It is impossible, in our present mentaldevelopment, to realize the stupendoussize of this World. Yet what we see aroundus, seemingly infinite as it appears to be,IS FINITE AND HAS AN END; and when wecome to what we would call the limit ofthis World, we would see the followingpicture. On one side myriads and myriadsof stars, the Milky Way, beautiful com-binations of lights, etc., which, all takentogether, would appear as an infinitely largeSphere; and on the other side, utter dark-ness, darkness so complete, so terrible, thathere on Earth we could have no idea of it.It seems to be void of everything, dead; and

104

if we would travel through that darkness,where not a star is shining, even no vibra-tion of the Ether perceptible, for a seem-ingly endless time and through immeasur-able space, we would again come to anotherWorld, to a different agglomeration of whatwould appear to he another infinite numberof stars and suns and planets.That would be another World; and thatWorld, taken as a whole, is again a Sphere, agigantic Sphere floating in that EndlessOcean of seeming Voidness, seeming Dark-ness; and that Endless Ocean, which has NOLIMIT, with those floating Spheres in it,which are the Worlds, THAT IS THEUNIVERSE; and that UNIVERSE, BOIJND-LESSINFINITE, IS TI-JE ONLY CHILD,THE ONLY SON EVER BORN OF THE ONEGOD, OF THE ONE GREAT PRINCIPLE,TIIEABSOLUTE. When we visualize Divinityfrom the point of view even of Astronomywe have such a gigantic, overwhelming con-cept of what the Great Principle is that allreligious ideas of It are nothing but pale,limited thoughts, because they can nevergive us, as Science does, that wonderfulproof of the greatness of God, that GreatOne, called the Absolute, who is our Father.Our Earth is a beautiful star floating inthat Infinite Ocean, the Universe. The Lawof Attraction, a BASIC LAW OF UNIVERSALENERGY, PERVADES THE WHOLEUNIVERSE. Even in that Void Space, wherethere is seemingly nothing, where even the

105

visible light vibrations cannot penetratebecause they are too dense and are thereforecircumscribed to their respective Worlds,there the Law of Attraction, of Love, is stilloperating. That Law cannot be avoided;there is nowhere-e in the Universe a placewhere Attraction, or Love, does not exist;and Love is an Aspect of Divinity, the high-est we know of now. These scientific state-ments correspond exactly to the words of thePsalmist: IF I ASCEND UP INTO HEAVEN,THOU ART THERE; IP I MAKE MY BED INHELL, BEHOLD THOU ART THERE; IF ITAKE THE WINGS OF THE MORNING, ANDDWELL IN THE UTTERMOST PA.RTS OFTHE SEA, EVEN THERE SHALL THY HANDLEAD ME, AND THY RIGHT HAND SHALLHOLD ME."The Law of Love, the Law of Attraction,pervades the seeming voidness of inter-stellar space and is exercised instantaneouslyand eternally, because Time and Space donot exist for that Law. It is just as infiniteas Infinity and Eternity. And the Law ofAttraction is the great bond of Love unitingthe Worlds, the bond which Humanity hasalways consciously or unconsciously recog-nized, because it is a Universal Law. Whydo human beings congregate and formcommunities, cities, countries and nations?Why is it that we like to league ourselvestogether, to have brotherhoods, societies,unions? Because of that Law. All theWorlds and all the Stars are brothers; so are

106

we all brothers; and if the Worlds are placedin that relation one to another, and the Lawof Attraction is functioning so perfectlythere, why should it not be also consciouslyexercised among us human beings? Thatwould be THE FULFILLING OF THE LAW OFLOVE, OUR ETERNAL PRIVILEGE ANDDUTY. Scientists now realize the infinite pos-sibilities opened by that Law of Attraction,and they try to Communicate, through vibra-tions, with the different planets, becausethey know that vibrations will reach any-where, These are the indissoluble linksbetween the Worlds, formed by the Vibra-tions of Attraction, the Basis of UniversalHarmony. Therefore, these Worlds, theseStars and Planets, which seem to be isolated,are in reality not isolated, and form OneGreat, Perfect, Eternal Whole. They areno more isolated one from another than arethe cells in our bodies. ALL IS COMPLETEUNITY, AND WE OURSELVES ARE ALSONOT SEPARATE BODIES AS WE APPEAR TOBE; WE ARE PARTS OF THE ONE GREATUNIVERSAL BODY, UNITED, AND HELDTOGETHER BY THE LAW OF ATTRACTION.

ENERGY IS INDESTRUCTIBLE, THERE-FOR ETERNAL. SUBSTANCE IS IN-DESTRUCTIBLE, THEREFORE ETERNAL.THE UNIVERSE IS INDESTRUCTIBLE,

107

THEREFORE ETERNAL. THE SOUL ISINDESTRUCTIBLE, THEREFORE ETERNAL.

ENERGY IS INDESTRUCTIBLE, THERE-FORE ETERNAL. Primal Energy, being thebasis of everything, is indestructible. Thatwas explained in the First Lesson. It cannotdisperse itself anywhere because it pervadesInfinite Space, is One with it. There isnothing which can destroy it because it isall there is, and once it is indestructible, itmust be eternal because it must remain inthat condition forever. It has always existedand always will be existing.

SUBSTANCE IS INDESTRUCTIBLE,THEREFORE ETERNAL. What is Substance?What is the difference between Substance andMatter? Substance and Matter are two verydifferent things. Matter is a phenomenon, acondition of continual changes, elusive, mut-able. Substance is, on the contrary, a noume-non, something stable, permanent. The wordSubstance itself expresses it. It meanssomething which underlies, stands under as afoundation, from the Latin word "Sub-stare"-to stand under, support. Sub-stance is the first condensation of PrimalEnergy, due to its rotary movement. Thereis the free Energy and the so-called con-densed Energy, and from the combinationof these two is formed everything whichexists. Substance being made of an in-destructible, eternal element, Primal Energy

108

is just as indestructible and eternal as thelatter.First there is the Unmanifest, the Cause-less Cause, the Great Principle, the Absolutecalled God. Its first manifestation is PrimalEnergy. Primal Energy becomes in turn acause by itself. Its direct manifestation isSubstance, which is the underlying basicelement from which the whole Universe ismade. Substance is therefore universal.Being a noumenon, it is immutable, butexpresses itself in infinitely varied and con-tinually changing phenomena.

THE UNIVERSE IS INDESTRUCTIBLE,THEREFORE ETERNAL. The Universe isan infinite and eternal structure, conceivedin the creative imagination of its great Archi-tect, Cosmic Intelligence, reared out of Sub-stance through the agency of Free Energy,and indissoluble cemented by the immutableLaw of Attraction. All these elements whichcontribute to its existence being indestruct-ible, the Universe itself is indestructible,therefore eternal.

THE SOUL IS INDESTRUCTIBLE, THERE-FORE ETERNAL. Finally we have the Soul,indestructible, therefore eternal. At firstthe question may arise, "What is a Soul?Is there a Soul and can it be proven thatthere is a Soul?" It can-by logical deduc-tions. What is A SOUL? THE SOULS OFEVERYTHING, BE IT MAN, ANIMAL,

109

PLANT, MINERAL, OR GAS, ARE THOSESELF-PROJECTIONS INTO SUBSTANCE OFTHE UNMANIFEST, ETERMALLY PROCEED-ING FROM THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, THEABSOLUTE, RANGES FROM THE MOSTSIMPLE TO THE MOST COMPLEX, ANDCULMINATING IN THOSE INDIVIUAL-IZED, CONSCIOUS, COMPOUND PROJEC-TIONS CALLED MEN.The Soul creates channels through whichto express its activities. These channelshave certain definite forms, and an aggrega-tion of them is called a body. The plane onwhich the Soul is functioning, be it thephysical, the mental or the Spiritual,determines the appearance of the body andthe elements of which it is formed. In otherwords, the body is the direct result, theproof, of the Soul's existence. But the bodydies. What then happens to the Soul?Does the Soul also disintegrate, die? No!The body is nothing but an effect, the Soulbeing the cause; therefore the destructionof the effect can in no way impair the cause.One body destroyed, the Soul builds upanother body, always of a stronger, bettermaterial, until it reaches a stage where itsbody is made of indestructible elements.Such a body becomes then eternal, because itis indestructible.

Therefore the death of the body does notmean the annihilation of the Soul, for theSoul cannot die, nor can it ever be lost.But the sense of' the Soul can be lost, and

110

when that sense of the Soul is lost, thenhappens what is called in the Apocalypse,THE SECOND DEATH, which means thatthe unit called a Soul is thrown back intothe very deepest plane of Involution, fromwhere it has to start all over again themillions of years of experience until itreaches once more the stage in which it lostthe sense of its own existence. Each one ofus, in our present state of Evolution, is theproduct of millions and millions of years ofhard, very hard work. We have been throughsuch experiences that if most of us couldconsciously remember our past, it wouldbecome one of the greatest curses Humanitycould have, because we would be so weigheddown by the remembrance of these expe-riences. Fortunately we have it now behindus. Divine Wisdom has covered that sadpast with a veil of forgetfulness. Otherwise,life on Earth with all its efforts, aims andendeavors, would become almost impossible,on account of remorse for that past. Ineach successive incarnation, it is givento men to start their lives anew.THE SOUL IS INDIVIDUAL. WE HAVEA GREAT NUMBER OF PERSONALITIESWITHIN OURSELVES AS REMNANTS OFPAST INCARNATIONS, BUT WE HAVEONLY ONE INDIVIDUALITY, the individualbeing compared to the note in music or thenumber in mathematics. That is our individ-uality, OUR ETERNAL IDENTITY. MAN ISINDIVIDUAL. Personality is but the human

111

concept which we have for the time being ofour own self, and our present personality ismade up of many personalities.

THE BASIS OF MAN'S EXISTENCE ANDIDENTITY IS THE SOUL,. THE BODY ISBUT A TRANSITOPY CONDITION OR EX-PRESSION OF THE SOUL'S PRESENT ACTIVI-TIES, THEREFORE, AS THE ACTIVITIESOF THE SOUL CHANGE, SO DOES THEBODY CHANGE ALSO.

In this proposition we have somethingbasic, fundamental the Soul; that is, thedirect emanation of the Great Principle,the Absolute, of Divinity, conscious andperfect in every way, Its image and likeness.The question may be asked, "Is there aninfinite number of souls?" Yes, 'there is.Because, even if each soul manifests thecompleteness of the Absolute, the perfectimage and likeness of which is represented init, the Infinity of the Great All can onlybe represented by infinite number of soulsthat make up that Great All, as in theirinfinite number, they stand for the Infinity ofthe Absolute. Each soul is identical withDivinity in quality, not in quantity; buttaken all together, they are identical withthe Great Principle also in quantity, andthus constitute the Great Compound Soul ofthe Universe. It is a Law which is con-tinually expressing itself in Nature. For

112

instance, take a solution of salt, or any othercrystallized chemical, and when that solutionis saturated and crystallization begins, itcrystallizes in thousands and thousands ofsmall crystals. What is the Law hack of it?The solution is full of energy, manifested invibrations going in different directions.There are a great many of those vibrations,each unit of which individually expressesitself through the chemical elements in theform of a small crystal, all the crystalstogether representing the quantity of thesolution, and each crystal having also all thequalities of that solution. Nature works inthis way, and Nature always expressesitself exactly according to Universal Laws,manifested in that ordinary experimentwith the solution of any salt. The same Lawalso governs the relation of souls to theirPrimary Cause, the Great Principle.The Soul, therefore, is THAT WHICHSTANDS AS THE BASIS OF OUTEXISTENCE,of our life, of our identity and individuality.Individuality is in the soul. Each soul hasfrom Eternity its own fixed identity whichno other soul can have. Never two soulsalike, never two lives alike. Each has itsown place' in the Universe. When the Soulhas found that place, it will keep it forEternity. That is why the basis of man'sexistence and identity is the Soul.What is the body? The Soul acts. Itsqualities, its forces, are expressing them-selves through its activities, and the aggre-

113

gate manifestations of those activities, out-wardly outlined, form a body. Body doesnot mean only a material form; it may be amental, a Spiritual body. It depends on theplane on which the Soul expresses itsactivities. What do the eyes stand for?They stand for perception. We perceive,we see through the eyes. What do the earsexpress? They express discrimination. Eachpart of our body expresses a certain activityof the Soul-the heart, emotion; the brain,capacity to think, to coordinate, or thegoverning power; the shoulders, power tobear responsibilities; the feet, the founda-tions on which we stand; the legs, the powerto move forward, to advance; the hands, thepower to act, etc. The body is but a transi-tory condition or expression of the Soul'spresent activities. When the activities ofthe Soul change, the body also will be modi-fied according to the changed activities ofthe Soul. Human beings of today are saidto belong to the Fifth Race. Its emblem isthe Pentagram-the five pointed star. Thatis why we are now expressing, manifesting,the number Five. We have five fingers,five senses, etc. The previous Race, inwhom the activities of the Soul were lessdeveloped, were supposed to have only foursenses, perhaps only four fingers. Fourwas their dominant number. The nextRace, the Sixth Race, will have six senses; itwill manifest, express the number Six.Their bodies will be modified according to

114

their souls' activities. Its emblem will bethe six pointed star,-the Star of Wisdomwhere the two principles, the male andfemale, combine in one.It is a scientific fact that the body isrenewed periodically. Every seven years(some authorities say three, others everyyear) each part is made new-tissues,bones, etc. Why is there this divergence ofopinions? Because some individuals whosevibrations are slow renew their bodiesslowly. Those whose vibrations are rapidrenew them quickly. Their vibrations arehigher and therefore their change is muchquicker. They can renew in three, perhapsin two years, or even in one year. Thatrenewal is all due to the activities of the Soul.In that first proposition the material body,our present body, does not enter yet, as aseparate concept. It refers in general to"a body." WE SHALL ALWAYS HAVESOME KIND OF A BODY. THE SOUL MUSTHAVE A BODY, because that is the outwardmanifestation of its inner qualities. Whatform the body will take we do not knownow, but it certainly will have a form andalways a more and more beautiful, a moreadvanced form. Everything has a form;form is a quality of the Soul; therefore bodieswill always have some form. On the higherplanes, where the activities of the Soul havefiner elements through which to expressthemselves, the bodies continually changein their appearance. Those whose eyes are

115

trained to perceive the life vibrations of thebody, called the Aura, know that the colorand the force of the Aura change all the time.When we have one kind of thought or emo-tion the Aura is one color; with another kind,another color; all due to the activities of theSoul.

THE SOUL OF MAN, OR THE REAL SELF,WHICH IS MAN, IS A COMPOUND, INDIVID-UALIZED, SELF-CONSCIOUS, PROJECTIONOF HARMONIOUS VIBRATIONS, PROCEED-ING FROM THE INFINITE SOURCE OF ALLENERGY AND BEING THEREFORE ENTER-NAL,. IN PENETRATING INTO THE MA-TERIAL, WOULD THE SOUL, ATTRACTSFROM ITS SURROUNDINGS (AIR, WATER,EARTH ETC.) ALL THE NECESSARY ELE-MENTS TO CONSTRUCT A VEHICLE ORBODY FOR ITS EXPRESSION ON THISEARTH PLANE. AFTER IT HAS EXPRESSEDITSELF ON THE EARTH PLANE FOR ASUFFICIENT LENGTH OF TIME, THEGREAT LAW CALLS IT TO PROCEED FUR-THER TO DO SOME OTHER WORK. THESOUL LEAVES THE BODY, WHICH, BEREFTOF ITS COHESIVE POWER, DISINTEGRATESAND GIVES BACK TO ITS NATIVE ELE-MENTS THE MATERIALS OF WHICH ITHAS BEEN CONSTRUCTED.

116

the manifestation, the ray, of the Absolute,called also the son of God, and which is anindividualized compound projection of har-monious, self-conscious vibrations. Whenthere was given, in the First Lesson, adefinition of what man is, a different word-ing was used because it was approached fromthe point of view of the Absolute, whereeven vibrations were not mentioned as beinga too material concept. But now the samesubject is taken up from the point of viewof the science of vibrations, and in a wayvibrations are very tangible things tangibleas far as their perceptibility is concerned.The Soul is a compound unit of these vibra-tions; that is, all the infinite varieties ofvibrations of the Absolute, focused in aninfinite number of individual points, aresouls-conscious, harmonious, individualprojections of Self-Consciousness, proceedingfrom the Infinite Source of all Vibration andbeing therefore eternal, because they haveeternally the nature of their Father, theGreat Principle. When these souls, theseaggregated self-conscious vibrations, focusedin individual points, penetrate into thismaterial world, in order to have a body,a material vehicle, through which to expressthemselves on this plane, they attract (theforce of Attraction being their inherentquality) around themselves all the differentminute electrons, atoms, and so forth, andbuild with those elements a body. That isdone, as we all know, through the mother

117

by means of gestation. The Soul which is tobe incarnated sends its vibrations into themother's womb; there it touches, in thefemale egg, a unit of the male seed whichhad penetrated there; from there the lifebegins to unfold and the Soul to expressitself more and more through that littleseed, combining its own activities withthose of the mother, and thus forming littleby little the body which it will call its own.The mother provides the building materialthrough breathing, eating, and so forth, andfeeds the body of the future child; and theSoul continually attracts around its ownactivities the material elements providedby the mother, thus forming its future body.During that physical union between menand women, the main object of which is theconception of another being, some of thestrongest physical, mental, and emotionalvibrations are brought forth. In that mo-ment is determined what kind of a soul shallbe incarnated in the mother's womb. Likeattracts like. If the vibrations of the twoparents are harmonious and of a high rate, ahighly evolved soul will be attracted. If,on the contrary, both parties, or even one,will manifest vibrations of disharmony,vibrations of a low rate, a soul whose vibra-tions correspond to that rate will be thusattracted. THEREFORE IT IS MOST USSEN-TIAL THAT THE PROSPECTIVE PARENTSCONSIDER THAT BODILY UNION AS SOME-THING VERY SACRED AND PURE, AND

118

THAT THEY PERFORM IT WITH A HIGHEROBJECT IN MIND THAN THE MEREGRATIFICATION OF A CARNAL.. APPETITE.IT MUST BE A GLORIOUS HYMN OF LOVE,INWHICH EVERY FIBER OF THEIR TRIUNEBEING, BODY, MIND, AND SOUL, SENDSOUT ITS MOST PERFECT VIBRATIONS.No physical union should ever be toleratedwhen the two parties are not in completeharmony with each other at that moment,else most disastrous effects will descendupon the child born of such a disharmoniousunion.The Soul which incarnates is not withinthe seed; it only overshadows it, combines itsindividual life force with that of the seed,thus making the seed grow and become thechannel for its expression on this Earthplane. When the nine months of gestationare over, the body is completely formed andthe child is born and becomes a separateentity. The Soul then acts through thechild as through a separate, individualchannel, not needing the mother any more.The Soul expresses through the body ofthe child all its functions only when thechild reaches the age of puberty, and isready for procreation. When the Soul hasexpressed through the body all its functions,even the function of procreation (which is aDivine quality, and one of the greatest theSoul possesses) , then only is it fully equippedto fulfil properly its mission on this Earth.The Soul then continually expresses itself

119

through that body, the vehicle built by itfor its own use. The material body is theinstrument, the channel, through which theSoul contacts the outer world and manifestsitself and is perceptible on this materialplane. When the time comes for the Soulto go to another plane to work there, ithappens so that through circumstances (theindividual having become sick or old) theSoul leaves the body; and as soon as itabandons the body, the latter, being nolonger held together by the cohesive power,the force of Attraction inherent in the Soul,begins to disintegrate, to give back to theelements the materials of which it has beenformed. There are the words of the Bible:"Dust thou art, and to dust thou shaltreturn." Out of dust was the body created,and to dust does it return. Out of invisiblelittle particles is formed the material body-sometimes a very beautiful body-but whenthe Soul goes away, that body reverts backto dust. Thus we see that the body reallyreturns to its primitive condition of simpleelements. Therefore, when we lose some-body on this plane, we should never mournover the body which was dear to us as thcvisible manifestation of the Soul we loved.That body is just as outworn as an old suitof clothes. It may be a remembrance tous, but it is a worn-out garment, which theSoul has replaced with another garmentmuch more beautiful.We see continually in Nature this chang-

120

ing of bodies. Let us take the caterpillar asan example. The caterpillar dies as a cater-pillar, becomes a chrysalis. The soul of thecaterpillar is no longer satisfied to crawl onthe ground; it wants to fly. By and by thatconsciousness unfolds in it, and when it hasunfolded itself perfectly, and has createdall the necessary apparatus to be able to fly,the chrysalis bursts and the butterfly comesout. That is why the butterfly is consideredthe symbol of the Soul which frees itselffrom the old body. The Soul, by the suc-cessive putting on and leaving off of itsdifferent bodies, creates more and more per-fect vehicles for its expression, until itfinally reaches a stage where its bodybecomes as perfect and indestructible as isthe Soul itself.When we are born again, we start lifeanew. We have within us all our pastexperiences, although most of us are notconscious of it. Even those who are themost advanced have to work hard for anumber of years in order to become fullyconscious of their own knowledge. It tookJesus over thirty years before He was able tounfold within Himself all that was neededfor His divine mission, and yet He knew,from the very day when He entered thismaterial plane, that He was to save theWorld. Tradition says that He went intothe Ephesian schools to study the Science ofBeing. That Scientific study, that period ofinner development, was necessary in order

121

to bring back to Him in His material embodi-ment that which He already knew fromEternity. If we consciously express theLaws of Harmony now, we shall be able toprolong our lives, and especially we shall beable to keep to the very limit of our days astrong body-a body strong not only in itsactivities, but also young and harmoniousin form. If people would live as Jesus did,they would not need to die. They wouldraise their vibrations higher and higheruntil finally they would be translated intoanother plane, as were Jesus, Elijah, Enochand others, thus overcoming the last enemy,Death. It is not the changing of one bodyfor another that makes people fear death; itis the pain connected with it, because mostpeople suffer terribly when those ties betweenSoul and body are severed. It is also anacute mental agony, especially for thosewho love life and yet do not believe in a lifehereafter; and that is why, after all, theprocess of dying is such a sad thing. Whenour mental attitude towards it will havechanged, then our physical experience ofthat transition will also be greatly modified,and we will not fear it any longer. On thecontrary, the ABSOLUTE CERTAINTY THATWE ARE GROWING INTO A BETTER, FINERBODY, raising us into a higher condition,will make us almost desire that change

122

THE HUMAN BODY IS A CURRENT CON-TINUALLY RENEWED BY THE ASSIMILA-TION OF GASES THROUGH BREATHING,AND THE FEEDING OF THE MOLECULES,DIRECTED, ORGANIZED, GOVERNED, BYTHE IMMATERIAL FORCE WHICH ANI-MATES IT AND WHICH IS CALLED THESOUL.

The previous proposition simply gave usman born, the Soul incarnated, manifestingitself through a material body. It gave usthe process of that incarnation, the processof building the body, but it did not say howit will keep the body, how it will live in thatbody. This proposition explains that. Itsays the body is a current, which is scientific-ally correct. It is a current of vibrations, acurrent of Life continually flowing throughus. That vital current which flows throughthe nerves, through the bones and throughevery cell in the body-that current,aggregated, outlined, is the body itself; andthat current is kept alive first of all throughbreathing, or the assimilation of gases. Thegases feed that current. We usually thinkthat the feeding of our body by means ofthe mouth and through the stomach is themost important. But this is not so at all.In the year 1920, the Mayor of Cork,MacSwiney, showed that he could live a verylong period, approximately seventy-six days,without eating, yet he could not have livedfive minutes without breathing. That proveshow much more important breathing is than

123

the actual material food. People of todayrealize that more and more, and that is whythere are so many different systems ofscientific breathing. Some of them areexceedingly good. TO BREATHE PROPER-LY, THAT IS, TO BREATHE SCIENTIFIC-ALLY, IS ONE OF THE VERY IMPORTANTTHINGS FOR US TO KNOW IN ORDER TOKEEP STRONG AND HEALTHY; yet, un-fortunately, our knowledge of that is verylimited. Most human beings do not knowat all how to breathe properly. They livesuch an artificial life that even that mostessential function of the body is undeveloped.There are different kinds of systems ofbreathing; the best are those which areevolved in the very country where they areto be used. That is why the Orientalsystems do not suit so well the Westernpeople, and vice versa.There are, throughout the world, a greatnumber of systems of diet. One of the best,up to the present, is considered that ofHorace Fletcher, an American. If peoplewould follow Fletcher's or any similarsystem, they would never know what stom-ach trouble is, and also there would be noshortage of food, because he proved scientific-ally that people could eat half of what theyeat now and yet be stronger and healthier.It is only necessary to masticate the foodproperly.The digesting of the food is done first bythe mouth, then by the stomach. When the

124

food is broken to pieces through mastication,a certain amount of energy is thus liberated,absorbed by the mucuses of the mouth andconveyed directly to the brain, which istherefore the first to receive Life Force in thatliberated condition. The masticated food isthen sent through the alimentary canal to thestomach, which starts its digestion. In orderto digest the food properly, the stomachproduces gastric juices, whose chemical qual-ities are so powerful that they can dissolvealmost anything they come in contact with.The gastric juices produced by the stomachare of a different kind for each food. There-fore, in dietetics, a simple food is alwaysadvisable in larger quantities-more of onekind and not so many different kinds com-bined. For each kind of food we absorb, thestomach must produce the correspondinggastric juice. Suppose there is a dish com-posed of six or seven ingredients. Then thestomach has to produce at the same time sixor seven different gastric juices, whichnaturally it cannot do, because it can pro-duce only one kind of juice at a time. Notbeing able to solve the problem in a satisfac-tory way, it loses its head, and the losing ofthe stomach's head means indigestion; there-fore, people who eat very complicated food,usually discover that in their older days theycan hardly eat any food at all. Those wholive on simple food, on the contrary, even ifthey become, very old, still keep theirstomachs in a fine condition to the very end,

125

because they never gave to their stomachswork which that organ could not do properly.Fresh, well prepared but simple food, in asufficient quantity, especially vegetables andfruits, well masticated, is all anyone needs toinsure proper digestion. The current of LifeForce is therefore also fed by the chemicalreaction, called the burning process, whichis produced by the digestion of the food.That is what is meant by the feeding of themolecules, a work which is all done-thecurrent directed, properly organized, andgoverned by that invisible, immaterial, in-dividualized, conscious force, which we callthe Soul. Even there, in that material body,the dominant power is not the visible body,but that invisible entity which is underlying,governing and sustaining it-the Soul. It isall so systematically arranged that it seemsto work automatically. THERE IS NOTHINGMORE WONDERFUL AND BEAUTIFUL ONTHIS EARTH PLANE THAN A PERFECTHUMAN BODY, THE "TEMPLE OF THELIVING GOD," as an Apostle calls it.

THE HUMAN BODY, AS MATERIAL AS ITMAY APPEAR TO US, IS BUT A HARMOI-OUS GROUP FORMED BY THE IMMATE-RIAL FORCES OF THE SOUL.

This last proposition, which closes thecycle of the body, seems very much like thefirst, in which it was stated that the basis

126

of man's existence and identity is the Soul,and the body is but a transitory conditionor expression of the Soul's present activities.Those two propositions appear to be alike,yet they are not. The first one refers to "abody." It does not state a material body;it mentions only a body. It could just aswell be a mental body, an astral body, or aSpiritual body. This last proposition appliesspecifically to a material body, which,material as it may appear to us, is after allbut a harmonious group of cells, of mole-cules, of atoms, of electrons, of vibrations,formed by the immaterial forces of the Soul,and held together by the Law of Attraction.The invisible forces of the Soul have mouldedthat visible form, that living statue, calleda human body; and these forces are alsopermeating it, sustaining it, and are thevery substance of that body. After thevery deepest point of involution has beenreached, where one seems to be at the bottomof Matter in its densest aspect, the scientificfact is discovered, that even there it is NOTTHE SO-GALLED MATERIAL BODY WHICHIS THE GOVERNING POWER, BUT THESOUL, which has formed that body throughits own activities. And as the Soul hasformed it, so can the Soul also modify andchange, even now and here, on this materialplane, this body of ours. In other words,reaching the bottom of matter, we find thereSPIRIT; THAT IS, SPIRIT IS EVERYWHERE.What applies to the human body also

127

applies to any other body, to the bodies ofanimals, plants, minerals and gases. Theyare all formed in the same way, accordingto the same principle, the same law, ashuman bodies. The reason why only thehuman Soul and body are mentioned isbecause they are the highest in Nature;therefore, naturally, when one speaks ofthe highest, the lesser is also included in it.Jesus, in His Sermon on the Mount, did notmention that we should love animals, plants,and so forth. As far as we know, He veryseldom even referred to them, because Heunderstood that if we loved Man, the high-est, naturally we would love everythingbelow. Why then did Buddha teach suchwonderful respect to all Nature? He livedin a country where animal and plant lifereached an extraordinary development; itexpressed itself in most cases in very beauti-ful forms and became a very importantpart in the daily life of the people. Buddhataught His fellow beings to love as theiryounger brothers all those entities belongingto the different kingdoms of Nature, torespect their lives. Thus He prepared Hisfollowers to love better their own fellow men,the highest manifestation in Nature. Greatteachings always make the best practical useof their immediate surroundings, be it ofplace or of time. They are always attunedto the period in which they are given, so asto make the process of Evolution as easy aspossible. Jesus, when He was giving His

128

teachings, said to His disciples: "Manythings have I to tell you, but you cannotbear them now." In spite of being contin-ually with Him, His disciples could notunderstand all of His teachings, becausethey were not ready. When Krishna, wholived long before Buddha, came to proclaimthe gospel of Truth, He did not speak aboutNature in the way Buddha spoke; His teach-ings remind one much more of those of Jesus.Why? Because it was again a differentperiod in which He lived. That period ofHumanity's Evolution required teachingswhich appear to be more similar to theteachings of Jesus than those of Buddha.The same was with Vishnu. Yet Jesus,Buddha, Krishna. and Vishnu are One,because there is only one Savior of theWorld, who comes to this Earth at differentperiods, under different names, as a differ-ent personality. The Eternal Individualityback of all those personalities was, is, andever will be the same One. Vishnu, Krishnaand Buddha were just as much Saviors ofthe World as was Jesus, and as there cannotbe several Saviors, they must all be OneEternal Savior -- Love Divine.

"FOR THE PROTECTION OF THE GOOD,FOR THE DESTRUCTION OF EVIL DOERS, IAM BORN FROM AGE TO AGE," IS THEMESSAGE OF LOVE TO SUFFERING HUMAN-ITY.

129

LESSON THREE1. QUES. What is Matter?

ANS. Matter is certain vibratoryphenomena perceptible throughthe senses. It is by Naturechangeable.

2. QUES. What is the origin of Matter?ANS. Primal Energy is the noumenon,

or basis, from which the phenom-enon called Matter originated.

3. QUES. What is the nature of Matter?ANS. It is essentially elusive. It is

called the Great Illusion.4. QUES. What are its aspects?

ANS. Solid, liquid, and gaseous form.5. QUES. What are its qualities?

ANS. Weight, density, volume.6. QUES. What is now the smallest known

particle of Matter?ANS. The electron.

7. QUES. How many kinds of electrons arethere?

ANS. Two, the positive (male) and thenegative (female) electrons.

8. QUES. What is an electron.?ANS. An electron is a tiny sphere,

rotating On its own axis, andmade of pure, condensed PrimalEnergy.

9. QUES. How is an electron formed?ANS. Individual units of vibrations of

Primal Energy, in rotating aroundtheir own axes, become condensed

130

and form a microscopical spherecalled an electron.

10. QUES. What is an atom?ANS. An aggregation of electrons, a

planetary system in miniature.11. QUES. What is taken as the unit of

atomic weight?ANS. An atom of Hydrogen, which has

only two electrons, a positive onearound which revolves a negative.

12. QUES. What is a molecule?ANS. It is an aggregation of atoms.

Molecules constitute all materialelements.

13. QUES. What determines the weight andthe hardness of a material ele-ment?

ANS. The number of electrons in anatom of it. In other words, theamount of condensed Energydetermines the qualities of theelement.

14. QUES. What other quality does Matterpossess?

ANS. It is radio-active. It emanatesPrimal Energy.

15. QUES. What is the cause of radio-activity?

ANS. The disintegration of Matter, therelease of Primal Energy con-tained in it.

16. QUES. Are all material elements radio-active?

ANS. Yes.

131

17. QUES. Which is the most radio-active sofar as is known now?

ANS. Radium.18. QUES. What determines the preciousness

of an element?ANS. The amount of condensed Energy

contained in it.19. QUES. What is the difference between a

noble individual and a commonone?

ANS. An individual of noble characterexpresses his energies on a higherplane, in stronger, higher vibra-tions than others, and is conse-quently of more value to Human-ty.

20. QUES. What is the scientific definition ofMatter?

ANS. Matter is but the consciousness ofeffects produced on the senses byvarious manifestations of PrimalEnergy. Therefore Matter is onlya state of consciousness, thepresent manner in which thoseeffects are perceived.

21. QUES. What is the human body?ANS. It is an aggregation of vibrations

in different degrees of condensa-tion. It is a dynamic center.

22. QUES. On what principle is the Universebuilt?

ANS. On the same principle as isformed the electron-throughcondensation of Primal Energy.

132

23. QUES. What is the basis of the visibleUniverse?

ANS. Invisible, Primal Energy.24. QUES. What is the Fundamental Law

of' the Universe?ANS. The Great Law of Attraction

which governs the whole Universeand is the basis of EternalHarmony.

25. QUES. Are the words "Attraction" and"Love" synonymous?

ANS. They are. Attraction is the scien-tific name for Love.

26. QUES. What is the connecting linkbetween the component parts ofthe Universe (worlds, planets,etc.)?

ANS. The Great Law of Attraction,which is exercised instantaneouslyand eternally throughout allSpace.

27. QUES. What is the difference betweenthe word "World" and the word"Universe"?

ANS. There is but one limitless andeternal Universe, which is madeup of an infinite number ofWorlds.

28. QUES. What is our Earth?ANS. A beautiful star, floating in that

infinite Universe.29. QUES. What is Man's eternal privilege

and duty?ANS. The fulfilling of the Law of Love.

133

30. QUES. Why is Primal Energy inde-structible?

ANS. Because it is the effect of anindestructible Cause, the GreatPrinciple Itself.

31. QUES. What is Substance, and why is itindestructible?

ANS. Substance is the first condensa-tion of Primal Energy. Beingmade of an indestructible ele-ment, Primal Energy, it is alsoindestructible.

32. QUES. Why is the Universe indestruct-ible?

ANS. Because its basic elements, PrimalEnergy, Substance, Cosmic In-telligence and the Law of Attrac-tion are indestructible.

33. QUES. What is the Soul, and why is itindestructible?

ANS. Souls are individualized self-projections of the Unmanifestinto Substance. They are eternalbecause they are the manifesta-tions of the Great Principle Itself,

34. QUES. Is the Soul individual?ANS. Yes.

35. QUES. What is the difference between"Individuality" and "Personal-

ANS. Individuality is man's eternalidentity. Personality is but atransitory human concept of thatIndividuality.

134

36. QUES. What is the basis of man'sexistence and identity?

ANS. The Soul.37. QUES. What is the body?

ANS. The body is the aggregated mani-festations of the Soul's activities,outwardly outlined.

38. QUES. Does the body change?ANS. Yes. The body is modified to

conform to the changing activitiesof the Soul.

39. QUES. How often is the body renewed?ANS. Every one to seven years, accord-

ing to the individual.40. QUES. Shall we always have some kind

of a body?ANS. Yes, because the body is the

proof of the existence of the Soul.41. QUES. Has the Soul only a material

body?ANS. No. It evolves bodies correspond-

ing to its different stages ofevolution.

42. QUES. What is the difference betweenthe Soul of Man (his real self),and Man himself?

ANS. None.43. QUES. How does the Soul incarnate

itself on the material plane?ANS. It attracts from its surroundings

(air, water, earth, etc.), all theelements necessary to constructa vehicle, or body, for its expres-sion on this earth plane.

135

44. QUES. Through what medium does thatincarnation take place?

ANS. Through the human mother, bythe process of gestation.

45. QUES. What attracts the Soul which isto be incarnated?

ANS. The extraordinarily strong vibra-tions projected by the parentsduring their physical union.

46. QUES. Why is it important that suchphysical union should be some-thing sacred, inspired by thehighest emotions?

ANS. Because of its immediate effecton the Soul to be incarnated.

47. QUES. Is the Soul which incarnates con-tained in the seed?

ANS. No. It only overshadows it.48. QUES. When does the Soul express all its

functions through the body ofthe child?

ANS. When the child reaches the age ofpuberty, and is ready for pro-creation.

49. QUES. Is procreation a quality of Matteror of Spirit?

ANS. Of Spirit.50. QUES. Why does the body die?

ANS. Because the Soul withdraws fromit, being attracted to a differentplane, where it will have to dosome other work.

51. QUES. What becomes of the body?ANS. It disintegrates, being bereft of

136

its cohesive power which residesin the Soul and returns to itsnative elements, out of which ithas been formed.

52. QUES. Explain the statement, "Dustthou art, and to dust thou shaltreturn.”

ANS. According to material science, itis the history of Matter itself.

53. QUES. Is the Soul re-incarnated again?ANS. Yes, in order to learn its lessons.

54. QUES. Will Reincarnation ever stop?ANS. Yes, when the Soul has learned

all its lessons, and will haverealized its eternal SpiritualStatus and its oneness with theGreat Principle. There is noReincarnation on the SpiritualPlane.

55. QUES. What is the human body?ANS. It is a current continually

renewed by the assimilation ofgases through breathing, andthe feeding of the molecules.

56. QUES. Which is first in importance,breathing or eating?

ANS. Breathing.57. QUES. What are the advantages' of

scientific, rhythmic breathing?ANS. It invigorates and purifies the

body, and stimulates all itsactivities.

58. QUES. Why should food be properlymasticated?

137

ANS. In order, first, to release thePrimal Energy by breaking upthe atoms of the food, and second,to transform the food beingmasticated into a homogeneousmass which will simplify thework of digestion for the stom-ach.

59. QUES. Why is the simple food preferableto the complicated?

ANS. Because the simple food, even ifof coarse quality, and taken inlarge quantities, is more easilydigested by the stomach than acomplicated food.

60. QUES. What is the invisible powerwhich is directing, organizing andgoverning all activities of thehuman body?

ANS. The Soul.61. QUES. Is the human body material?

ANS. No. It is only a harmoniousgroup of condensed vibrations,formed by the immaterial forcesof the Soul, and held togetherby the Law of Attraction.

62. QUES. When one has reached the densestaspect of Matter, the .bottom ofInvolution, what does one dis-cover?

ANS. That Spirit, the most immaterialthing that we know of, is at thebottom of it. As Spirit is alsoat the top of Matter, the logical

138

conclusion to be drawn is thatSpirit is EVERYWHERE.63. QUES. Do those propositions concerning

the human Soul and body applyalso to the souls and bodies ofanimals, plants, minerals, etc.?

ANS. Yes.64. QUES. Why did Buddha teach such great

love for Nature?ANS. Because he knew that everything

in Nature is a manifestation ofthe Great Principle, and is there-fore closely related to Man.

65. QUES. Why did Jesus, in His teachings,scarcely ever refer to Nature?

ANS. Because if human beings willlove their fellow men, theycannot help but love Naturealso. Who can do more can doless.

66. QUES. What is the message of Love tosuffering Humanity?

ANS. "For the protection of the good,for the destruction of evil-doers,I am born from Age to Age."

139

140

141

IFE Encrgy, when expressingitself through the human bodyas individualized life, vibrates,or radiates, from that bodyin what is called a Human

Atmosphere or Aura. That radio-activitydoes not only belong to human beings.Animals, plants, minerals, and even gases,possess also their own radio-activity. Inother words, everything there is, has anAura, a luminous atmosphere, surroundingit, and there are infinite varieties of Auras,due to the different kinds of MagneticVibrations. Auras of all bodies are formedin the same way, yet the Aura of the humanbody is the most interesting for investiga-

142

tion, because it presents the greatest numberof varieties. The human Auras vary accord-ing to the sex, state of health, and age ofthe individuals, and also according to theirphysical, mental, and emotional develop-ment. There are no two Auras alike. As ageneral rule, women have a more pronouncedand larger Aura than men. The human Auraconsists of three distinct strata. The first,the invisible stratum, which surrounds thebody like a band about half an inch thick, iscalled the Etheric Double. Out of thatEtheric Double emanates the second stratumof the Aura, called the Inner Aura. It is ofa misty appearance, like a delicate vaporsurrounding the body. It is usually abouttwo inches thick. Both strata, the InnerAura and the Etheric Double, preserve auniform thickness all over the body, follow-ing its contours. Surrounding the InnerAura, and emanating from it, is the thirdstratum of the Human Atmosphere, calledthe Outer Aura. That Outer Aura has theappearance of rays which contact the out-side atmosphere. Through those rays LifeEnergy both pours out of the body intoSpace, and pours into the body from Space.There is a continual coming in and going outof Life Force through those Auric Rays.When the contact is established between thelife force within the human body, and theUniversal Life Energy outside it, it isthrough those Auric Rays that the LifeEnergy pours into the body. The Outer

143

Aura is colored. The six colors of thespectrum are perceptible in it. Usually onedefinite color is so dominant that the othercolors become almost imperceptible. Thatdominant color in the Human Atmosphereis the so-called Individual Color of the personwhose Aura is being investigated. Indivi-duals in the lower stages of evolution haveoften their Auric Colors rather clouded withan unpleasant grayish-brown tint. But thehigher the individual is evolved, the purerand more luminous those Auric Colors be-come. If the Auric Colors of two individualsblend, they will feel in harmony with eachother. In the opposite case, they on the con-trary will have an unpleasant sensation andwill become restless, or even antagonistic.That accounts largely for the fact that weinstinctively like to be with some individualsand resent the society of others. The thick-ness of the Outer Aura varies with differentparts of the body, and displays marked differ-ence between the Auras of different indivi-duals. In some it has a thickness of fromthree to five inches, but its size may bevaried by changes in the physical, mental,and emotional qualities and conditions of theindividual. The Outer Aura is exceptionallystrong around the head. When flowingthrough the finger tips, the Life Force isperceptible as a sort of misty waves of differ-ent lengths. The strongest current pro-ceeds from the thumb. There, its visiblelength is about two and a half inches. Next

144

comes the index finger, whose current appearsto be about two inches long. The fourthfinger's current is visible only for about aninch and a half. The small finger's currentappears for about an inch. The middlefinger, the biggest of all, has a visible currentof only about a quarter of an inch. Thevisible length of these waves is increased inproportion to the strength of the magneticcurrent flowing through the hand. TheOuter Aura reaches sometimes a thicknessof several feet in certain individuals with avery strong mental or spiritual develop-ment. In the latter case, the whole natureof the human Aura is changed. Suchindividuals seem to be surrounded by rays oflight, of very beautiful and changing colors.Their Auras are not only very beautiful tolook at, but are also very soothing and heal-ing to an appreciable degree. It is oftensufficient merely to be in the presence ofsuch people in order to be benefited in everyway, physically, mentally, and morally.With a healthy person, the human Aura is ofa pleasant, pure appearance, and quiteregular in its stratification. Abnormal orunhealthy people, on the contrary, have avery irregular Aura, full of protuberancesand cavities. The human Aura, whenexpressing Life Energy alone, is not selfluminous, and can be perceived only by itsreflection of light. Yet the same Aura isshining with its own luminosity wheneverexpressing thought or emotion. A great

145

many diseases are nowadays diagnosed bythe appearance of the human Aura. Forthat purpose are used certain chemicalscreens impregnated with very sensitivechemicals, on which is seen, as luminosity,the human Aura, as soon as the individualplaces himself behind the screen. Anothermethod of detecting the human Atmosphereis to place the individual in front of a darkbackground, in a comparatively dim artificiallight. In this instance, little glass screensfilled with certain chemical solutions which,when one is looking through them, increasethe sensitiveness of the eye, are used in orderto enable the untrained eye to perceive theAura. Yet one can train one's eyes to per-ceive radio-activity without artificial aids.Those methods are used a great deal now inhospitals, by up-to-date physicians.Life Energy, being the FundamentalPower of the Universe, ought to be used inan ever increasing degree in everything wedo. No matter what kind of work we under-take, we should first make the contact withUniversal Life Energy by the mentalmethod indicated in the second lesson.Especially in human rela-tions, Life Energy becomesinvaluable.The politician can employ it to strengthenhis speech, the minister to vitalize his sermon,

146

the artist to find inspiration, and thescientist to solve his problems and makediscoveries. It is not only the privilege, butalso the duty, of human beings TO USETHAT LIFE FORCE IN EVERY DEPART-MENT OF THEIR LIVES, TO USE IT ALLTHE TIME, AND FOR EVERYTHING. Indoing so, an extraordinary change will cometo those who have been faithful and havepersevered to the end. They will noticeby and by that they can endure more workand strain without feeling the same sense offatigue as before. They become mentallymore efficient, because Life Energy flowingto their brain cells with an ever increasingforce stimulates them, and makes them workmore quickly and better. Reasoning be-comes clearer and more logical. And becauseof the excess of Life Forces radiating fromevery center of the body, work becomes whatit ought to he, a pleasure instead of anonerous duty. The individual grows alwaysstronger through the continual use of thatLife Energy.

147

It is one of the first duties which we oweas well to our selves as to others,if we want to succeed in life and becomeuseful members in the great Human Family.Forces are universal. Natureexpresses those Forces through every avail-able channel. We human beings are someof the most important channels, for theirexpression. Therefore we must be strong,and desire and develop that strength all thetime, thus rapidly advancing along the pathof Evolution. Weakness is not only animpediment, but is unnatural, because it isin direct contradiction to All Power.Whenever one wants to use Life Energyfor healing purposes, the best method ofprocedure is the following:{Note: Healing in any fashion should onlybe performed while keeping in mind that it’ssuccess should be subject to God’s will.It is thus required to include an appropriateaffirmation such as “God’s will be done,not mine, in me and through me” beforeattempting the healing prodcedure}Have the patient comfortably seated, in a chair,with body erect, yet not tense, relaxed physically,mentally, and emotionally. Then make themental contact with Universal Life Energy.After that contact is made, and the operatorfeels that Force flowing through him, hemust place his hands on the shoulders of thepatient in such a way that the two thumbs

148

are joined on the seventh vertebra of thepatient's spinal column. The seventh verte.bra is that prominence generally thought ofas the joint of the neck. It is one of the mostsensitive spots on the spinal column, andthe spot where the spinal nerve can be mostreadily and most easily influenced. Theother four fingers must be placed on theshoulders, pointing down the body. As themagnetic current always flows through thehand in the direction in which the fingertips are pointing, it is advisable, as a generalrule, whenever treating the upper portionof a patient's body, to have the fingertips turned down. That process mustbe reversed-that is, the finger tips mustbe pointed upward-when the lower portionof the body, from the waist down, is beingtreated. The reason for this is that in everyinstance the magnetic current must bedirected toward the solar plexus, which isthe great reservoir of that Force in thehuman body. After his hands have beenplaced in the proper position, all the operatorneeds to do is consciously to remain an openchannel for the Life Energy, that it mayflow through him. There is no special needto know which part of the patient's body is ina disharmonious condition. Life Energy,being self-governed, will do its work auto-matically, and will flow to those parts of thebody which are in the greatest need of itshealing powers. The operator must keep hishands on the shoulders of the patient until

149

he ceases to feel the life current flowingthrough him. At that moment the patient'sbody has reached the point of saturation,and can no longer absorb the MagneticForce. To continue the treatment would be awaste of time and energy. As a general rule,such treatments ought to last from five tofifteen minutes. No more precise indicationscan be given concerning the duration of thetreatments, because each case must behandled individually, as there are no twopeople alike, and as even the same personmay react differently at different times. Itis left to the inner sense and intuition of theoperator to determine when he is to stop.In practicing magnetic healing, one verysoon is able to develop that inner sense. Afairly good indication that the treatment isfinished, is a peculiar desire to take one'shands away from the shoulders of the patient.In case one wishes to treat a particular localtrouble, one can, in addition to that firsttreatment, give another, placing the handson the ailing part, and keeping them thereuntil one ceases to feel the Force flow. If thediseased portion of the body is very small,as in the case of eye, ear, brain, heart, orother localized trouble, one can bunch thefingers, bringing the tips together againstthe tip of the thumb, and thus concentratethe five individual rays of the Force uponone point. Such a concentration of theForce acts very strongly, and must there-fore be handled carefully, especially when

150

treating delicate organisms such as the eye.As soon as the patient begins to feel acertain burning sensation, due to that con-centration of the Magnetic Force into oneray, the operator must remove his fingersimmediately. Otherwise he may burn thepatient, as if with fire or scalding water, andburn him badly enough to produce a blister.In the event of such a magnetic burn, allthat is necessary in order to cure it is topass one's hand lightly over the injured spot,as if softly brushing it away, and all tracesof the magnetic burn will vanish like magic.It is important to remember that whenevera new treatment is started, even if on thesame patient, it is advisable to make a freshcontact with Universal Life Energy. Thisapplies especially to beginners, who do notknow how to keep themselves consciouslyopen to the continual flow of the Force theyuse. Later on, that renewal of contact foreach treatment becomes unnecessary, asthe conscious contact with the UniversalLife Energy, once established, remains forquite a considerable length of time.The method of treatment described aboveis the classical method, which can be modi-fied and varied in infinite ways. Forinstance, if the patient is lying in bed, or isotherwise so situated that the operatorcannot put both hands on his shoulders, onehand, the left one, can be placed so that theindex finger touches the seventh vertebra,and the thumb rests on the shoulder, point-

151

ing downward. The right hand of theoperator grips the left hand of the patientin such a manner that the index, middle,and fourth fingers rest on the inner side ofthe wrist, pointing up along the arm. If,for some reason, only the patient's bands areavailable, or even one alone, it is quitesufficient for the operator to make the afore-said contact with that. In exceptionalcases, where no physical contact of any sortis possible, the operator can send the currentinto the body of the patient by merelydirecting his finger tips toward it, using oneor both hands. The position of his arms isof little consequence, as it is the position ofthe finger tips which determines the directionof the magnetic currents. These act likelight rays emanating from a reflector, andare directed upward if the finger tips arepointing upward, or downward if the fingertips are pointing down.The magnetic current is naturally attract-ing, but it can be made repelling by a simpleeffort of will power.cases of self treatment, the way toproceed is as follows. Since one cannotconveniently place ones hands on onesown seventh vertebra, so as to convey themagnetic current into the body, the mentalcontact with the Universal Life Energy issufficient. As soon as one feels that theLife Force bas sufficiently saturated thebody, one can then use one's hand asdescribed above to heal any local trouble, by

152

placing it over the diseased spot. Thegeneral way of procedure is thenceforthidentical with that employed in treatingsomeone else. The only difference is in thebeginning, when the contact with theseventh vertebra and the shoulders isomitted.It is sometimes noticeable, in treatingone's self and others, especially in cases ofchronic organic troubles, that after a fewsuccessive treatments, when the generalcondition of the patient seems to have beengreatly improved, suddenly there occurs arelapse, and the patient may feel even worsethan before the treatment. That relapseis due to the fact that the diseased part ofthe body was, before the treatment, lackingin vitality.The disease was like a crust of carbonimpeding the normal functions of the affectedtissues, and cutting them off from thenutrition essential to their health. Whenthe vivifying current of Life Energy isdirected against the diseased spot, it actslike a blast of pure oxygen brought into con-tact with carbon. Just as carbon, upon itschemical union with oxygen, glows to asudden fierce incandescence, and thenvanishes, so disease when exposed to thepurging current of Life Energy, must burstinto an intense flame that consumes itutterly, thus burning away the barrierbetween the sick tissues and the flow of vitalforces. That is called magnetic chemicaliza-

153

tion. It is an unpleasant, but favorablesymptom. Therefore all one has to do insuch cases is to continue the magnetic treat-ment with increased energy. The ailmentwill be eventually completely destroyed, andthe diseased part of the body thus restoredto its normal condition.When treating, the operator must taketoward the patient an attitude of lovebecause one of the qualities of love is expan-sion. Expansion of the inner gatewaysthrough which the Life Energy is flowinginto the operator enables the Force to enterin greater volume, thus insuring a moresuccessful treatment.One of the many applications of themagnetic current for healing purposes isthe inducing of the so-called magnetic sleep-that is, a sleep induced by the use of themagnetic current. Individuals who sufferfrom insomnia, or who, for some otherreason, are unable to sleep, are greatlybenefited by this magnetic sleep which, nomatter how short it may be, rests andinvigorates the body beyond anything onecould ever expect. When induced in thedaytime, about fifteen minutes of magneticsleep is all that a patient can ever need.After that, the patient must be awakened,because to let him sleep longer would meanto go against the natural ascending move-ment of the Earth magnetic currents of thelay. This would result in a feeling ofheaviness, or often in a headache. A quarter

154

of an hour of magnetic sleep during the dayis equivalent to six or seven hours of ordinarynight's sleep. When the magnetic sleep isinduced at night, there is no necessity toawaken the subject, as the magnetic sleepwill presently lapse into normal sleep of itsown accord. in order to induce magneticsleep the following method is recommended.To start with, make the mental contactwith the Universal Life Energy. Then placethe hands, in the manner previously indi-cated, on the seventh vertebra of the subject,who should be comfortably seated in an easychair, with head reclining. When the bodyof the patient is saturated with the MagneticForce, take the hands from his shoulders,and stand in front of him in such a way thathis knees are facing the knees of the operator.The hands of the latter, thumbs joined andfinger tips pointing toward the forehead ofthe subject and lightly touching it, mustremain in that position for several minutes.Thus the magnetic current will flow intothe brain, will fill it to capacity, and willthen begin to condense because of the law ofAttraction, which continually operates withthe current and cements together all thesuccessive magnetic waves proceeding fromthe hands of the operator. The operatormust move his hands slowly down across theface of the subject, but without touchingit, as low as the solar plexus. Prom therethe hands are returned to their originalposition, each slowly describing a half circle

155

outward on its own side, and meeting theother before the forehead. From five tofifteen minutes, according to the individual,is sufficient to put the average subject intoa magnetic sleep. In some exceptional cases,the magnetic sleep is induced almost in-stantaneously, while in other cases it mayrequire several successive trials. Thosemovements of the hands which inducemagnetic sleep are called magnetic passes.Slow passes condense the magnetic current,that is, put the individual into a magneticsleep. Quick passes awaken, dispelling thecondensed forces. To awaken a subjectplunged into a magnetic sleep, all one needsto do is to repeat the same passes, only veryquickly instead of slowly. The subject willawaken, for the reason explained above. Ifthe subject does not feel completely awak-ened, a quick brushing movement by bothhands from the center of the forehead out-ward to the temples, and a similar operationfrom the back of the head, will entirelydispel every lingering sensation of drowsi-ness. When properly treated, the subjectmust awaken from the magnetic sleeprefreshed and invigorated, and with a pleas-ant feeling of buoyancy. An opposite effectwould indicate that the operator con-sciously or unconsciously used his willpower, and not the natural law, to put theindividual to sleep. In other words, hewilled, or hypnotized, his patient intoslumber. Such a method is very objection-

156

able because of its disharmonious effects onboth operator and subject. Therefore theoperator must guard carefully againstemploying his will power during the magneticpasses, and must let the law of Attractionoperate unimpeded. Thus he will obtain themost favorable results.In case of self-inducement of the magneticsleep, the method of procedure is quitedifferent. There the individual, who is bothoperator and subject, must clasp his handsbehind his head, and then make the mentalcontact with the Universal Life Energy.The Force will flow through his hands, andwill do its condensatory work, as a result ofwhich will come the magnetic sleep. Inorder to awaken in due time, if that sleepis induced during the day, one must impressupon one's Sub-consciousness, before goingto sleep, the order to awaken at the pre-scribed time. And the Sub-consciousness, inobedience to the command, will do it with asurprising readiness and a mathematicalprecision. No hesitation or doubt should bein one s mind when commanding the Sub-consciousness, as otherwise failure will be theresult.There is another problem which is bother-ing Humanity today, as it has done through-out all times. That problem is, how toattain Success and Prosperity. All kinds ofdevices and means are used by human beingsin order to reach this goal. Needless to say,illegitimate Prosperity attained through

157

wrong means, by taking unfair advantageof other people, is not and cannot be last-ing, because it is unnatural, transgressingUniversal Laws, and is ultimately most de-structive to its possessor. True Success andlegitimate Prosperity are always based on theLaws of the Absolute. They are the resultof our harmonization with Infinite Harmony,which is Power. That Power then flowsthrough every channel which we open to it.Yet why is it that some people, who seem-ingly follow and live in accord with the Lawsof Universal Harmony, are apparently un-able to demonstrate in their lives Successand Prosperity? In such cases, the causemust be sought in the individual himself.For some reason the channels through whichaffluence and harmony normally flow areeither undeveloped, paralyzed, or dried up.In the Absolute, that is, in the realm ofthe Real and the Eternally Harmonious –everything, every action,every cause, culminates in a perfect effect,which is complete Success. Affluence ineverything good, in all supply of all forcesand powers, is another eternal reality. Theonly reason human beings do not alwaysachieve it is because they are not always inaccord with it, or are closed to it.One of the sad experiences which Human-ity, especially, has to go through, togetherwith the rest of this material world, is old

158

age and death. in this world of materialphenomena, in this present state of conscious-ness, where everything has a beginning andan end, because of the limited concept ofTime and Space, the privilege of Youth, ofStrength or Power, of Beauty, is hut afleeting moment in human lives. Strange tosay, man supposed to he the highestmanifestation of the Absolute, has theshortest space of tune allowed him for theenjoyment of those privileges. Animals,plants, minerals, all seem to be much morefavored in that direction. About one thirdof the human life is spent in developing thatorganism which the Soul needs for itsexpression on this earth plane. The secondthird permits the enjoyment of that life.The last third is marked by a rapidly declin-ing curve. It is a continual disintegrationand loss of that which has been so painfullybuilt up during the first period of one's life.Whenever one thinks about it, one mustinevitably conclude that there is somethingfundamentally wrong and destructive, eitherin the Universal Laws and Forces of Nature,or in man. Universal Laws ARE funda-mentally constructive and harmonious. Soare the Basic Forces underlying all Creation.Therefore it is obvious that they cannot bewrong or destructive. Then, the onlylogical conclusion is that the wrong anddestructiveness abide in man himself. There-- and there alone-must be sought the causefor all human ills amid troubles, sorrow and

159

suffering. The cause once discovered, propermeans can be used in order to remove thatcause. One of the greatest privileges andpowers man has is FREE WILL. That FreeWill he can use constructively or destruc-tively. Man creates his own heaven and hisown hell. They are man-made, not createdby God. They are states of consciousness,not localities, and they last as long as oneremains a willing host to them.It has been proven nowadays thatindividual cells of the body,even when separated from that body, ifkept in proper surroundings, can not onlysustain their life, but can even develop andincrease. And as the body is composed ofabout fifty billions of those cells, one mustcome to the logical conclusion that thewhole of the body could live and prosperfor long periods of time, if permitted to doso. Ignorance is the cause of all the trouble.We do not know the vital importance ofattuning ourselves to the Laws of UniversalHarmony, which means Life Eternal. Weare relying all the time on the limitedreserves of life forces within us, and arespending them faster than our bodies supplythem to us, instead of being in constant

160

conscious communication with UniversalLife Energy. We continually transgressnatural laws, by eating improper food, aswell in quality as in quantity, and by wearinginappropriate clothes which interfere withthe normal functions of the body, eitherthrough pressure or through preventingthe body from getting all the benefit of theinvigorating action of the surroundingatmosphere, and the purifying and stimulat-ing influence of the sun rays. Such clothesare against common sense and the Laws ofHarmony and Beauty. We do not sufficientlyexercise that body of ours, and we undermineits resisting qualities by resorting to medi-cines and all sorts of drugs in case of illness,and by the immoderate use of alcoholicdrinks and more harmful drugs when we arewell. We think inharmoniously, and thosethoughts of ours-unaware in most casesas we are that they will some day be visitedupon us act most destructively on us.The same is true of our negative emotions,such as hatred, jealousy, revenge, etc.Even if we feel these emotions toward otherindividuals, ultimately we are the ones whowill be most harmed by indulging them,because of the law of Retribution. Inaddition to all this, that body of ours alsohas to fight continually all kinds of outsidedisintegrating influences, such as suddenchanges of temperature and atmosphericconditions, and the incessant assault ofinnumerable armies of microbes and deadly

161

germs of all sorts of diseases. And finallywe prey upon our own body, like vampires,in drawing upon each cell for life force,which we usually then consume within ourown self, wasting it in countless ways.Instead of supplying and stimulating eachcell of our body with Life Force from withinand from without, we tax each of thosecells to the limit of its endurance. Nowonder that after a certain time theybecome depleted of life force, their activitiesare lessened, and they exhibit the symptomsof old age and decrepitude. Under thoseconditions it is really surprising that ourmaterial body can live at all. The onlyreason why it can is because of its. extra-ordinary power of resistance. In order to dojustice to our own selves, and to do at leastas well as animals and plants, which increasein size, strength and beauty until almost thevery end of their earthly existence, we haveto start to live a normal and constructivelife, physically, mentally and emotionally.We have to take into consideration the Lawsof the Universe, and the Forces of Nature,and do our best to attune ourselves to them.And above all, we must make continualconscious contact with the Universal LifeEnergy, which by and by will fill to itsutmost capacity every cell of our body,thus making it grow and prosper in everydirection. Each one of us ought to devotefrom a quarter to a half hour daily to thegeneral invigorating and rejuvenation of all

162

our body. In order to obtain that, proceedin the following way. Seated in an easychair, make the mental contact with theUniversal Life Energy, and when the Forceis felt flowing, consciously direct it into thebrain, into every organ of the body, intothe tissues, the skin, the cells. Think it thatway, wish it that way, feel it that way.The guiding thought, backed up by con-structive will power, will make the best use ofthe inherent qualities of the Life Energy,namely, self-government and harmonization.Think Harmony, Youth, and Beauty; wishthem, feel them, knowing that they are theresult of the Eternal Law of Life and Love,CONTINUALLY EXPPESSING ITSELFTHROUGH EACH INDIVIDUAL. It is likebathing the whole human organism in aliving stream of Life Force and, if faithfullyperformed, the result of it will exceed allexpectations. Each cell of the body willexhibit a greater constructive activity, eachorgan of the body will perform its duties withan ever increasing power and precision, thusgiving all members of the body the possi-bility of manifesting in a most perfect waythe activities of the soul. The whole bodywill be gradually regenerated according to anew and better standard. We must alwaysbear in mind that our body is a statuemoulded by our soul with the chisel of ourthoughts, the Life Force of the Universesupplying both the material and the Energywhich the soul needs to perform that work.

163

The harmonious co-operation of all three isnecessary, yet in a way the Life Force ismost important, because without it thoughtand even the Soul itself are powerless. Themore one feels the Life Force flowing throughone's self during that conscious stimulationof the body, the better the process ofreconstruction and rejuvenation will pro-ceed; and a new, vigorous, harmonious, andbeautiful body, a proper channel for theexpression of the Soul, will ultimately bethe result. Thus the limits between deathand birth of human beings will be removedfurther and further apart from each other,health and longevity increased, and especial-ly one greatest advantage obtained, namely,the preservation of our physical, mental,and emotional powers in a state of strengthand activity, giving us the sensation andappearance of youth and beauty to the veryend of our earthly days. That willfinally bring another result which will comeas the logical sequence of that work ofrejuvenation, and UNINTITERUPTED, ETERNALLIFE, NOW ONLY A WONDERFUL HOPEWILL THEN BECOME A RADIANT REALITY

164

165

LESSON FOUR1. QUES. What is the human atmosphere,

or Aura?ANS. It is the radio-activity of the

human body, due to the emana-tion of Life Energy from it.

2. QUES. Does that radio-activity belongonly to human beings?

ANS. No. Animals, plants, minerals,and even gases possess also theirown radio-activity.

3. QUES. Is the Aura self-luminous?ANS. No. It is rendered luminous only

by light striking it.4. QUES. Are all human Auras alike?

ANS. No. They vary according to thesex, state of health, and age ofthe individual, and also to thephysical, mental and emotionaldevelopment.

5. QUES. How many strata has the humanAura?

ANS. Three. The Etheric Double, theInner Aura, and the Outer Aura.

6. QIJES. Which stratum is colored?ANS. The Outer Aura which expresses

the personal color of the indivi-dual.

7. QUES. If the auric colors of two indi-viduals blend, what is the effect?

ANS. They will feel in harmony witheach other. In the opposite case,they will feel indifferent or evenantagonistic.

166

8. QUES. How thick is the ordinary humanAura?

ANS. Prom five inches upwards.9. QUES. How can the Aura be perceived?

ANS. By mechanical means, or bytraining one's eyes.

10. QUES. What is the practical use ofinvestigating Auras?

ANS. To find out the general conditionof health, etc., of the individ-ual.

11. QUES. How often, and where, shouldUniversal Life Energy be used.

ANS. It should be used in every depart-ment of human life, all the time,and for everything.

12. QIJES. What practical result is obtainedthrough the continual use ofUniversal Life Energy?

ANS. The individual grows stronger inevery way, physically, mentally,and spiritually.

13. QUES. How is Universal Life Energyused for healing purposes

ANS. First contact it, then send itthrough the hands into the bodyof the patient.

14. QUES. At which point is the Magnetic

167

Force most readily conducted intothe body of the patient?

ANS. The seventh vertebra of thespinal column.

15. QUES. Does the magnetic current flowequally through all fingers?

ANS. No. It flows strongest throughthe thumb, and weakest throughthe middle finger.

16. QUES. What direction does the magneticcurrent take when flowing throughthe hands?

ANS. The direction in which the fingertips are pointing.

17. QUES. Does the magnetic treatmentwork automatically?

ANS. Yes, because Universal LifeEnergy is self governing.

18. QUES. How do magnetic forces work?ANS. Always to re-establish equilib-

rium.19. QUES. How long should a magnetic

treatment last?ANS. As a general rule, from five to

fifteen minutes.20. QUES. How does one know when to

stop it?ANS. By an inner sense that the patient

can absorb no more, because hisbody has reached a point ofsaturation.

21. QUES. How should one treat a localtrouble?

ANS. By placing one's hand on the

168

diseased part, and letting thecurrent flow.

22. QUES. How is the magnetic currentmost strongly concentrated on asmall area?

ANS. By bunching the finger tips.23. QUES. How is a magnetic burn cured?

ANS. By passing the hand lightly overthe injured spot.

24. QUES. Does one need to make a newcontact with Universal LifeEnergy for each successive treat-men

ANS. For beginners, yes.25. QUES. What would be the result if a

treatment were started withoutfirst making the contact withUniversal Life Energy?

ANS. The patient would immediatelyabsorb all the available amountof Life Energy stored in theoperator, and would leave himcompletely depleted.

26. QUES. Is it necessary, when treating apatient, to contact him physic-ally?

ANS. No. The magnetic current, ifproperly directed can be sent at adistance.

27. QUES. Is the magnetic current attract-ive or repellent?

ANS. It is naturally attractive, but itcan be made repellent through aneffort of will power.

169

28. QUES. How shall one proceed in treatingoneself magnetically?

ANS. First make the mental contactwith Universal Life Energy andlet it flow through the body.When the body is properlysaturated with it, use the handsas indicated above.

29. QUES. What is magnetic chemicaliza-tion, and what are its causes?

ANS. It is the seeming increase of thenegative condition of the patient,due to the vivifying power of themagnetic current.

30. QUES. Should the treatment be stoppedbecause of the chemicalization?

ANS. No. It should be continued withincreased energy, and the ail-ment will eventually be com-pletely destroyed.

31. QUES. What should be the attitude ofthe operator toward the patientduring the treatment?

ANS. One of compassion and love.32. QUES. Is it necessary to treat the patient

mentally at the same time?ANS. No, though a scientific mental

treatment ,combined with the mag-netic one, produces better results.

33. QUES. What is the magnetic sleep?ANS. It is a sleep induced by the use

of the magnetic current.34. QUES. What is the difference between

magnetic and hypnotic sleep?

170

ANS. The first, based on Life Power, isbeneficial; the second, based onwill power, is detrimental.

35. QUES. When is the magnetic sleepneeded?

ANS. In case of insomnia or weariness.36. QUES. How long should it last?

ANS. About fifteen minutes when in-duced in the daytime; throughoutthe whole night when induced atnight.

37. QUES. What is the method of procedure?ANS. Make the mental contact with

Universal Life Energy, and let thecurrent flow through the handsinto the brain of the patient.Then move the hands slowlydown, without touching the faceof the patient, as low as the solarplexus. From there the hands arereturned to their original position,slowly describing a half circleoutward, and meeting before theforehead of the patient. Repeat.

38. QUES. How long does it take to inducea magnetic sleep?

ANS. Prom a few minutes upwardvarying according to the indi-vidual.

39. QUES. What is the correct method forawakening one from a magneticsleep?

ANS. Use the same movements, onlyquickly instead of slowly.

171

40. QUES. What are those magnetic move-ments called?

ANS. Magnetic passes.41. QUES. Why should a magnetic sleep

induced in daytime last onlyfifteen minutes?

ANS. Because it is against the ascend-ing movement of Primal Energy.

42. QUES. How is magnetic sleep inducedon oneself?

ANS. By clasping the hands behindthe head, and making the contactwith Universal Life Energy.

43. QUES. How does one awaken oneselffrom a self-induced magneticsleep?

ANS. By commanding the subconsciousself, before going to sleep, toawaken one at the desired time.

44. QUES. What are the usual causes ofpoverty and material limitations?

ANS. Undeveloped, paralyzed, or dried-up channels through which af-fluence and harmony shouldnormally flow.

172

45. QUES. What is method of procedureto rejuvenate an old body?

ANS. Make the mental contact withUniversal Life Energy, and con-sciously send it to every part ofthe body, to every organ, toevery cell.

46. QUES. Hew often should this be done,and how long each time?

ANS. Every day for about a quarterof an hour each time.

47. QUES. What will be the result?ANS. The body will be completely

renewed and made stronger,younger and more harmonious.

48. QUES. Has it been done before?ANS. Yes, so far as is known, by Enoch,

Elijah, Jesus, and others.49. QUES. What promise given to Humanity

about two thousand years agowill thus be realized?

ANS. The Uninterrupted EternalLife, now only a wonderful dream,will then become a RadiantReality.

173

174

175

EVEN LAWS IN THE PRESENTSTATE OF HUMAN CON-SCIOUSNESS GOVERN THISWORLD. OF THOSE SEVENLAWS, THREE ARE ETERNAL,IMMUTABLE, LAWS OF TILE

ABSOLUTE, AND FOUR ARE TRANSITORY,MUTABLE, LAWS OF THE RELATIVE.

THE THREE LAWS OF THEABSOLUTE

1. LIFE, MIND TRUTH, LOVE, SPIRITIS ALL IN ALL.

2. THE SAME LAW GOVERNS ALWAYSEVERYTHING, EVERYWHERE, IN THESAME WAY, FROM THE GREATEST STARDOWN TO THE SMALLEST ELECTRON.

3. EVERYTHING IS VIBRATION.

176

In the Absolute, those three Laws are OneLaw, called the GREAT LAW. To our pres-ent state of consciousness that One GreatUniversal Law manifests itself as a triuneray; we perceive it in its threefold aspect, ourconsciousness acting as a prism; therefore, aswe are studying these Laws now, we mustconsider them as they appear to us at present.

LIFE, MIND, TRUTH, LOVE, SPIRIT, ISALL IN ALL. These Five which wereexplained in the first lesson are the Alphaand the Omega, the beginning and the end ofeverything; they are a Law by themselves,the Law of Life, of Mind, of Truth, of Lovewhich is the Law of Spirit. They includeeverything, and that is why Jesus, who knewthese Laws, said, "Love thy God (The GreatPrinciple) with all thy heart, and with allthy soul, and with all thy mind, and withall thy strength, and love thy neighbor asthyself," and when He was asked further,"what about the other commandments?" Heanswered, "All the laws and all the prophetsare in those two commandments." TheGreat Principle, the Absolute, is all Life,all Mind, all Truth, all Love, all Spirit;all there is, is in the Great All, andif we apply that Law, the Law of Life, ofMind, of Truth and of Love, to all problemsof our daily life, we work out, without notic-ing it, all the perfection we can ever aspire to,

177

we build up the Pyramid of our own lifeand reach the Point of Spirit, and we donot notice how it happens, because it is theGreat Principle Itself Who is working tothat end through us. It is Its work as muchas ours. All we have to do is to be conscious,open channels for that.

THE SAME LAW GOVERNS ALWAYSEVERYTHING, EVERYWHERE, IN THESAME WAY, FROM THE GREATEST STARDOWN TO THE SMALLEST ELECTRON. Thewonderful simplicity of that UniversalLaw is that there is but ONE LAW whichunderlies all other laws, operates on allplanes, and expresses itself through every-thing, always in the same way. The forma-tion of the electron, of the atom, of the body,of our planet, of this World, of the Universe,are ALL BASED ON THAT ONE LAW.Everywhere is seen the operation of thatLaw, which is also called the Law of Analogy,''AS IT IS ON THE HIGHEST PLANE SO IT ISON THE LOWEST." That is, that OnePattern is expressed through millions ofaspects and yet is always One. For instance,let us take the sphere. An electron is amicroscopical sphere. Vapors are made upof tiny spheres of water. A dewdrop is asphere, and so are the particles of mercuryor the little red and white corpuscles in ourblood. A soap bubble is a sphere, our

178

Earth also, and all other planets, the sun,the stars, and the worlds. Why? Becausethe Great Law says that everything whichwants to .persevere in existence must takethe form of a sphere, which is a body inwhich all parts are in perfect relation one toanother and also to its center, and whichtherefore is so perfectly balanced that itcan offer the maximum resistance to allkinds of outside disintegrating influences.Another example: All vibrations emanatefrom a given point in all directions in waves,forming continually increasing spheres. Astone thrown in the water starts sphericalvibratory waves, which, where they touchthe surface of the water, appear as circles,enlarging till they reach the shore of thatbody of water. It is the same with all othervibrations, sound, light, Hertzian waves,magnetic waves, also thoughts and SpiritualVibrations, all this again because of theGreat Law, which decrees that all vibrationsmust normally proceed in waves, formingcontinually increasing spheres which arekept in that condition by the Law ofAttraction perpetually operating throughthose vibrations. That Law is so infinite,so universal, that in our present mentaldevelopment we can only begin to perceiveits numberless manifestations. That Lawis often also called the Great Law. Theknowledge of that Law enables one to calcu-late with mathematical precision even thingsthe nature of which is as yet unknown to us.

179

Geometry, mathematics, all exactsciences, have the Great Law as foundationof their individual laws. For instance, threetimes three makes nine, and three milliontimes three million makes also nine plus asmany zeros as there are zeros in the twonumbers. Why is it so? Because of theGreat Law expressing itself through themathematical laws. Those who study zo-ology also discover very soon the variousmanifestations of the Great Law. There areso-called wild animals, lions, tigers, panthersand so forth. Their coats are of certaincolors, arranged in certain designs, whichare expressing their qualities. The samecharacteristics are found among birds ofprey, eagles, hawks, owls, etc., as theseoccupy amongst the birds the correspondingplace to that occupied by wild animalsamong the beasts. It is the same amongfishes, insects, mushrooms, trees, plants andminerals. The same distinguishing colorschemes, the same combinations, throughoutthe whole round of Nature. Take the rain-bow, that wonderful bridge, shining with thesix colors of the spectrum and connectingHeaven with Earth. Its iridescence, pro-duced by the refraction of light, is found onthe soap bubble, on oil-coated water, in thediamond, also in the opal, that stone bothprecious and mysterious; it is displayed onthe wings of certain butterflies, on differentinsects, on birds, and even in the hair ofhuman beings, where there is a certain

180

iridescence. Why? Again because of theGreat Law. Throughout the whole cycle ofCreation are everywhere seen these wonder-ful expressions of the Great Law. Infiniteare the aspects through which it continuallymanifests itself. There is the glorious sun-set, wonderful colors in the sky. But thesun's rays have no color, they are white;the clouds have no color, they are also white;the air has no color, it is transparent; yettaken together in a certain combination, theyall make a wonderful sunset. It is the rela-tion of the different lights one to another,shades and lights, white rays broken up indifferent rays, interpenetrating and combin-ing one with another colorless elements,yet producing the most wonderful colors.All this is the result of that one Great Law.

ALL IS VIBRATION. This is the thirdand last of these Absolute, Immutable Laws.Is it possible that Vibrations will be eternal?They will be, as they always have been.Even Spirit Itself communicates throughvibrations. Maybe some day they will becalled by another name, but it is not thename which is so important, it is the natureof the thing itself. THE WHOLE UNIVERSEIS BUT VIBRATION. When we speak thesound is conveyed through vibrations;through vibrations do we also see, smell,taste and touch. Everything is done through

181

vibration. Sound is vibration, light isvibration; so are the emanations of radium,wireless telegraphy, telephony; all usevibrations as agents. Thoughts also arevibrations; so is Lye; everything is vibrating;vibrations are penetrating all planes, andtherefore even in the Absolute everything isvibration. There are different rates ofvibrations, infinite varieties of them, someso high, so subtle, that of them we cannothave any concept just now. ALL IS ETER-NAL VIBRATION BECAUSE VIBRATIONIS LIFE ITSELF, AND LIFE IS ONE OFTHE FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS OF THEABSOLUTE, THE GREAT PRINCIPLE. Theoperation of this Law is explained in detailin the second, fourth, sixth, and seventhlessons.

THE FOUR LAWS OF THERELATIVE

1. THE LAW OF POLARITY2. THE LAW OF RHYTHM.3. THE LAW OF GENDER.4. THE LAW OF CAUSE AND EFFECT.

THE LAW OF POLARITY: EVERYTHINGIN THIS WORLD IN THE PRESENT STATEOF HUMAN CONSCIOUSNESS APPEARS TOHAVE TWO POLES, THE POSITIVE ANDTHE NEGATIVE POLES-GOOD AND EVIL,HEAVEN AND HELL, LIFE AND DEATH,LIGHT AND DARKNESS, DAY AND NIGHT,

182

WHITH AND BLACK, SOUTH AND NORTH,PEACE AND WAR, YES AND NO, POSITIVEAND NEGATIVE, ETC.

Everywhere, no matter where we turn,there is that law of Polarity or Duality.It is the law of the Pairs of Opposites. Anyopposites, even men and women, come underthat law. It is a very important law, whichwe think we cannot master, to which wemust submit, as it has taken possession notonly of the physical but also of the mentalplane. In the most ancient religions, thelaw of Duality or Polarity is manifested,prevalent. There are the Days and Nightsof Brahma, the Absolute ,----Manavantarasand Pralayas, periods of activities andperiods of rest, periods of manifestation andperiods of non-manifestation, periods ofbeing and periods of non-being. It is believedto be an immutable Law, a Law of theAbsolute, but that is not correct. In one ofthe sacred books of the Hindus, in theBhagavad-Gita, Krishna, the One WhoKnew, when speaking about the Absolute,about Divinity, said that GOD IS ABOVETHE PAIRS OF OPPOSITRS, that means,ABOVE THE LAW OF DUALITY OR POLAR-ITY. The law of Duality therefore cannotbe a Divine Law if God is above it becauseGod and Divine Laws must be one. UNITYIS THE LAW OF THE ABSOLUTE. Yetreligious, philosophical and sometimes scien-tific teachings are based on the law of Dual-

183

ity. As long as the law of Duality, or Polar-ity, will be accepted as an immutable law,it will keep this World enslaved. Peace andHarmony will remain but a beautiful dream,because that law means a continual warfarebetween the two principles, the positiveand the negative-and there is the question,which one of them will win? One will for atime, and under those conditions, Harmonycan never be attained. When oppositesare coming together they emphasize eachother's opposition. It is only like whichattracts like, and thus becomes one whole;but there is no possible unity between twoopposites.It is one of the most subtle and powerfullaws on Earth, that law of Polarity or Dual-ity, but it is not an eternal law, despite theassertions of some of the oldest Religionsand greatest Philosophies. Humanity ishypnotized by it, and as long as humanbeings will submit themselves to that law,it will operate and they will always beswinging between life and death, good andevil, peace and war, and so forth. If weanalyze that law from the point of view ofScience, we find that it is not a true law.We say there is light and there is darkness,yet this is not a correct statement. THEREIS ONLY LIGHT. Darkness is but a supposi-tional absence of light. There is no suchthing as real darkness, because light vibra-tions penetrate everywhere. We think thatlight is only what we see. Yet we perceive

184

only the range of rays from red to violet-that is, the six colors of the Spectrum.There are also rays below the Red andbeyond the Violet which we do not see, andthose invisible rays are the most powerful.Light visible and invisible is everywhere,therefore there cannot be, THERE IS, NODARKNESS. There are only degrees anddifferent kinds of light. All, IS LIGHT.Even that seemingly utter darkness andvoid of the inter-stelier space is penetratedby vibrations, invisible to the human eye,of the Absolute Light, which is Attractionor Love. The same with good and evil.There is no absolute evil. There are onlyconditions of relativity, of good. There isthe ultimate good, and there is the veryfirst starting point of good, and naturallythere is all the scale to develop from thepoint to the infinite. It is obvious that ifthe point and the infinite are placed together,the contrast is so great that they appear tobe opposites. Yet such a comparison is notright, as there is all the infinite number oflinks between them, each successive linkbeing a part of that endless chain or circlewhich has no beginning nor end. Thisscientific fact cannot be ignored. GOOD,taken from the scientific point of view, ISEVERYWHERE, OMNIPRESENT. There aredegrees of good, that is all, but no evil.Evil is but a suppositional absence of good,therefore non-existing, as good is all-pervad-ing. The same is found to be true with

185

every other pair of opposites which one beginsto analyze. Soon the fact is discovered thatit is only the positive which has a realexistence. The Earth has two poles. One iscalled the North and the other the Southpole. The South pole is a high mountain,the North pole is a cavity; hut we call themNorth and South poles because we imaginethat there is a top and there is a bottom.If we change our position, then really theNorth pole would be below and the Southpole above. One must try to visualize thosethings also from the point of view of theAbsolute and not only from that of theRelative. Scientifically speaking, there is noEast or West, as a definite location; it is buta direction, pointed out by the magneticneedle, relative to the point from which oneis taking it. When we are in China, theEast will be in America, but when we arein Europe, America becomes West to us andChina would then be East. These are onlyhuman concepts, created and used by us todistinguish the Unlimited with our limitedperception; to find, to direct ourselves in theInfinite, which has no direction.There is the YES and NO. How few peopleknow that as soon as we make a positivestatement and say, "Yes, I am going to dothat," immediately from somewhere outof the unknown arises the silent opposition"No." And it works so strongly againstus, that we usually then have all kinds ofdifficulties in performing that which we

186

intended to do. Why does it happen?Because of the law of Polarity. The law ofPolarity continually interferes with all ourhuman affairs. That is why we are all thetime swinging between good and evil,between hope and fear, between success andfailure. There is another law still worsewhich usually works together with the lawof Polarity, and that is the so-called law ofRhythm. Both are there, ready to stop allhuman endeavors, to destroy our works, andthus prevent us from progress. A greatmany people have had experience in thatdirection, and they have grown wise; theynever will say "I am going to do that"; theysay "I am going TO TRY," because theyhave noticed that as soon as they make apositive statement, something seems to becontinually interfering with it. Yet nothingof that kind happens if a neutral form ofspeech is used. What is the reason? Whydoes the negative seem to be so strong whenthe positive should be the stronger? Whenwe make an individual statement, a positiveone, we simply state the positive from ourhuman point of view; we hack it up onlyby our own limited forces. It is just ascircumscribed as we humanly are circum-scribed; yet it is not a little part of thenegative, but the whole of it, which the lawof Polarity causes to rise automatically eachtime as a negation, in opposition to our posi-tive statement. That is why it is so over-whelming. Just as the whole of the ocean

187

striking a little piece of wood carries itaway, so the whole of the negative, in whichHumanity believes, and utterly fears, sweepsaway and destroys our individual positivestatements. YET, POSITIVE STATEMENTSCAN BE MADE IN SUCH A WAY THATNOTHING CAN DESTROY THEM. If we say“WITH GOD’S HELP” or 'WITH THEHELP OF THE GREAT LAW I am going todo that," such a statement covers the wholeground, because NEITHER GOD NOR THEGREAT LAW HAVE OPPOSITES. Satan onceattempted to oppose Divinity, but thatopposition proved itself a complete failure.The world is not divided between good andevil. The Great Principle is the ONE,ONE, and IT IS ALL. Therefore, when weplace the Absolute or the Great Law behindour statements, we can make any statementwe want, because there is no possible oppose-tion to those two.Another way to neutralize that law ofPolarity is continually to refuse to see thcnegative, always to place thc weight in thepositive scale, to try to see, even in thingsmost unpleasant, something good. Thuswe cast the weight in the right scale, in thepositive, and the result is, that. by and bythe law of Polarity will be neutralized, andfinally will cease to operate in our Jives at all.Then, ONLY the positive will come to us.Usually there is always the negative comingtogether with the positive because of thatvery law of Polarity; but when we will have

188

overcome that law, we will realize that thereare no opposites any more, no days andnights, but, metaphorically speaking, onlyan Eternal Day. In the Revelation, theInspired Writer, when describing the HolyCity, which lies foursquare-that is, theRealm of Perfection-says 'There is nonight there." There is NO NEGATIVE, NOLAW OF POLARITY IN THE ABSOLUTE.THERE ALL IS UNITY.We must not only affirm good, hut SEEGOOD, KNOW GOOD; not try to excuse evil,but to explain it. We must, through ourown reasoning process, see the real motivebehind everything, and then we will alwaysfind something positive. There is never acomplete absence of good. When we makestatements in our daily life, WE MUST BEPOSITIVE, but positive with the Great Lawbehind us to back up our words. We shouldrecognize the law of Polarity only to theextent of endeavoring to overcome it, andwe should always know it to be a TEMPO-RARY MUTABLE LAW above which we mustsome day rise. When we overcome that law,we rise to a power unknown to us now,because so great. The best way to get rid ofsomething negative, is first to detect it;second, not to fear it, and finally, toDESTROY IT BY REALIZING ITS NON-EXISTENCE IN THE REALM OF ETERNALHARMONY. Simply to close one's eyes andsay there is no such thing as evil is not practi-cal at all, as that very thing will then usually

189

happen, precisely because of the operationof the law of Polarity. If we want to dosomething, LET US DO IT, AND KNOWTHAT THERE IS THE GREAT LAW BEHINDUS, WHICH WILL GIVE US AID ANDASSISTANCE IN ALL THAT IS RIGHT.Everybody knows how difficult it is tokeep a secret. It seems to be burning onone's lips; one is almost compelled to giveit away. Why? Because of the law ofPolarity. When we are told NOT TO TELL,the Silent Opposition, due to the continualoperation of the law, says, "DO TELL," andwe usually yield to that silent command. Peo-ple call it temptation, the voice of evil; in real-ity, it is but the working of the law of Polarity.Very often we find ourselves undecidedas to what we have to do. Why is it? Againbecause of the law of Polarity. We take adecision and as soon as we take one, wealmost regret that we did it. With somepeople that law of Polarity is working sostrongly that they are always undecidedas to what they shall do. It is not becausethey cannot decide, for THEY CAN DECIDE,but because they are so subject to that law ofPolarity, so one with it, that whenever theymake a decision, immediately there arisesthe silent opposition which makes themchange their decision, and take another one.As soon as they have taken that new decision,the old one comes up again, and so on, untilby an effort of will power, they keep to one.Take people who have what is called the

190

spirit of contradiction. Whenever we begina conversation with them, they must alwayscontradict what we say. They like to argue,because of the law of Polarity. They arguesometimes against their own convictions.They cannot help it.We can try them with a little experiment,which shows how the law of Polarity isworking. When they start to argue, con-centrate for a few moments and silentlydeny the law, deny its power, and affirmUnity, Harmony, so as to cast the weightinto the scale of the positive. Then probablythe individual, instead of continuing toargue, will say, "What is the use of arguing?"There we have not only a good example ofhow to get the best of somebody's spirit ofcontradiction, but also, and what is moreimportant, of how to overcome the law backof it. And when we do that, we must notsay, even mentally, to the individual thathe is not going to argue; that mental processmust be done within ourselves impersonally,entirely forgetting about the person whodoes the arguing.Action and re-action is another manifesta-tion of the same law. When people havebeen going for some time in one directionand have reached a certain limit, they turnsuddenly back and go in the oppositedirection, to return again to the first one,and so on indefinitely.That is especially noticeable in all kindsof religious, scientific or political move-

191

ments. After a great spiritual uplift, thepeople get very realistic; after a verymaterialistic age, the people again are seek-ing something spiritual. The reason why itis so difficult sometimes to work in certaindirections, is because with each step onetakes forward, there is that tendency to gobackward, due to the law of Polarity, inconnection with which usually operates alsothe so-called law of Rhythm.Students of psychology know well thatpeculiarity of the human character. Yetthat characteristic of most human beings isnot an integral part of them; it is but thelaw of Polarity expressing itself throughhuman channels, who, in most cases, notknowing how to rise above that law, becomehelpless tools in its hands. Therefore, it isvery important for us to study, to analyzethat law and to learn how to master it.The law of Polarity was first brought downinto Involution by Mind itself; it is its crea-tion, its own child. Later on, however,that law grew so strong that it subdued itsown creator, and became one of the mostrelentless of masters. It has taken possessionof the two planes, the physical and themental; from there it governs the world witha rod of iron; but we can, and, with the helpof the Great Law, WE WILL, some day, over-come that law of Polarity and be free again.

192

THE LAW OF RHYTHM: EVERYTHINGIN THE WORLD, IN THE PRESENT STATEOF HUMAN CONSCIOUSNESS, INHALESAND EXHALES, GOES UP AND DOWN BYCOMPENSATED OSCILLATIONS.This law is also called the law of thePendulum, because its operations are in away similar to the swinging of the pendulum.The pendulum goes up one side, down again,up again, and so on. That law operates inour life on two planes, the physical and themental, in many different ways. To startwith, its functioning on the physical,material plane will be explained. This isespecially noticeable in waves during a stormon the sea or on any other body of waterwhere waves are brought forth by a storm.The following design shows how the energyof the wave is directed by that law.

The upward and forward movement ofenergy carries the wave higher and higher,until it reaches a culminate point. Thencomes a moment when, through its ownweight, the wave breaks down and falls,seemingly to continue again its forward andupward movement. That is only an appear-ance, however. In reality, the energy whichhas raised that wave, after it has reached itshighest point, does not proceed at all the

193

way it seems to. ['he law of Rhythm entirelyreverses its movement. After it has reachedthe culminate point it suddenly turns withinand goes all the way down and backwarduntil it reaches the farthest point back, thepoint where it started its forward move-ment. And when it has reached the farthestand lowest point, then it starts to go upagain, first under the water as an invisible,propulsory force, then appearing on thesurface again as a wave, to reach its climaxand then start hack again under the water.A certain part of its forward movement isdone on the surface as a wave, but all itsbackward movement, and a part of its for-ward movement, are done under the water,unseen but still most strongly operating.That is how the waves of the ocean aremoving. Every swimmer knows that under-current; it is called the undertow, which isso dangerous because it sucks in. But howfew realize that it is all due to the operation,on the physical plane, of the law of Rhythm.on the physical plane, so also does thelaw of Rhythm operate on the mental plane,because in both instances it is governed bythe one immutable Great Law. We, whoconsciously live on these two planes, areunder that law of Rhythm as long as wehave not learned how to rise above it.As are the waves on the ocean, so isHumanity's Evolution. It goes forward andupwards until it reaches the highest point,then begins the decline into its backward

194

movement. It goes down with ever increas-ing speed until it reaches its lowest andfarthest point, from which it starts its climbagain.As we see the energy of the ocean movingpartly on the surface of the water as a wave,partly under the water as the undertow,so it is also with Humanity's Evolution.The progress of Humanity begins to benoticeable only when the law of Rhythmbecomes apparent in social life, just likethe visible waves on the ocean, the beginningof whose ascending movement remains un-seen under the water, until it bursts forthas a visible wave. But all the importantwork was really done, so to say, in thesecrecy of the ocean itself. The silent, un-seen progress is due to the hidden forwardmovement.When the backward movement starts,at first it is almost unnoticeable, but itsspeed increases all the time until it hasreached the lowest point. There again, asin the ocean, the backward movement isnot so much seen as felt. On the surfacethings seem to be still moving forward, butthere is the undertow, which sucks in anddown all those who are not strong enough toresist that backward and downward move-ment. The backward movement is sostrong as to bring Humanity almost to thesame point from which it started, and thelittle gain still made is due exclusively tothe operation of another law called the Law

195

of Evolution, which in some measure counter-acts the operation of the law of Rhythm. If we would express in mathematicalfigures the advancing movement of theHuman Race, and then its receding move-ment, due to that law, they would read asfollows: In the forward movement, Humanityhas in its progress advanced, metaphoricallyspeaking, twelve feet, but when the back-ward movement starts, the law of Rhythmthrows Humanity back eleven feet, elevenand three-quarter inches, and the wholeprogress is thus reduced to one-quarter of aninch, That is the reason why Humanity'sEvolution is so very slow. We have livedcountless ages and yet we have progressedcomparatively very little, all because of thatlaw of Rhythm. If it were not for that law,which keeps it back, Humanity would longago have solved its problems of Evolution.That law would have kept humanity foreternity in its clutches, if there were not theLaw of Evolution, which states that “ALLVIBRATIONS TEND NATURALY TO RISEUPWARDS IN THE SCALE OF ETERNALHARMONY." That Law is a ray of Hope,sent by Love to suffering Humanity touplift it, to counteract to some extent theoperation of the law of Rhythm. Becauseof that Law of Evolution we see all vibrationsalways striving upwards in spite of the law ofRhythm working continually against it.It will be explained now how that law ofRhythm works in our daily lives. Most of

196

us have had the experience that there arecertain days when everything is successfuland other days when anything we start is afailure. It is the upward and downwardmovement of the law of Rhythm which pro-duces these differences. It must he remem-bered that as there are big waves on theocean, there are also smaller waves. Eachbig wave is made up of smaller ones, andeach little wave is governed by the same lawand manifests the same kind of movement,forward and backward, as does the big wave,the law of Rhythm working in identicallythe same way on all waves.Men of business also know that law,sometimes consciously, most of the time un-consciously. There are certain periods intheir business when things go well, andperiods when things do not go well. Thoseperiods are sometimes long, sometimes short,just like waves on the ocean, and they repeatthemselves. In History certain facts alsocontinually repeat themselves and we thensay: "History repeats itself." It is the lawof Rhythm which is the underlying cause ofthose forward and backward movements.People who have been successful in their lifeare those who have mastered that law; thatis, they acted like good swimmers on a stormysea. When the law started to draw themback, they did not lose courage or beginto fear; on the contrary, again like goodswimmers, they courageously did their bestnot only to remain afloat on the top of the

197

wave, but to swim so vigorously as toadvance even in spite of the opposing cur-rent, until by and by, at each attempt, theywon some point. The result was that finallythose waves, instead of drawing them back-ward, really began to carry them onwards.Sometimes it may be a slower, other timesa quicker, movement, but it will always be aforward movement. There is no longer anybackward movement possible. Under thoseconditions, when it happens on the waterof the sea, we say the storm is over. Whenit happens in our life, we say we havemastered unsuccess --we are successful. Ifone analyzes the lives of most successfulpeople, no matter to what department oflife they may belong, be it Religion,Science, Business, Statesmanship, Arts orPolitics, one will find that any man orwoman who has ever been successful hashad the same experience. In the beginning,great hardships, handicaps and failures, yetthey persevered, failing maybe hundreds oftimes, but advancing still, full of energy,arid still hoping that some day they wouldmeet with success. One day they did meetwith success, and that day they neutralizedthat law to the extent that we humanly canin our present state of consciousness. Eventhen that law can bring them a little downbut still it always remains a forward move-ment.Now there is the question, how to neutral-ize that law and take advantage of its for-

198

ward and upward movements. The firstthing to do when we see that the law ofRhythm is carrying us backwards is not tofear, not to be discouraged, and to try toswim as vigorously as we can against theopposing current. Even if, in spite of ourefforts, we are carried far back and deepdown, after all it does not matter how muchbackwards we are carried by the law; theimportant point which we must always keepin mind is that some day, because it is thelaw of Rhythm, it must start again its for-ward and ascending movement. Being alaw, it must be true to itself. Therefore,even at its worst, there is always a hope forus that we will leave the bottom some day,if we will persevere, and if we do not letourselves be discouraged and remain on thebottom like a stone which cannot be carriedforward by the ascending movement of thelaw. That is why we say that "a man maybe down but not out." When the bottom isreached, then the ascending movementstarts, and finally the highest point isreached. Wise people know that then isthe time to be careful. We can master thelaw, yet we must watch it till we have reallyovercome it. That does not mean to fear thelaw, but to be cautious, and when we see thebackward movement starting again, topolarize ourselves on the positive andsimply refuse to be carried back, like a goodswimmer fighting the undertow.When the law of Rhythm begins its

199

backward movement, we must persevere inwhat we already have on hand, because it isour duty to hold on to that; but we mustnever start anything new once the back-ward movement has set in. It usuallyturns out to be a failure. Naturally, if onecan stand through the backward movementtill it has reached its very lowest point, thensome day one may become successful; hutwhy waste all that energy in order to fight.the backward movement? when it is mucheasier and more rational to wait for theascending movement of the law. Successwill come then by simply waiting for thepositive operation of the law. Thus wewill have saved all the energy which other-wise would have been wasted in fighting,and then we can use it to better advantagein combining it with the forward movementof the law of Rhythm.In our lives we all have periods of successand periods of unsuccess, due to the opera-tion of that law. Therefore, whenever wesee that we are on the way to success, wemust DO ALL WE CAN during that time inorder to take in every direction everypossible advantage of the positive side ofthe law of Rhythm. That law is an auto-matic, unconscious law, but WE ARECONSCIOUS. We can, therefore, outwit thelaw, and we have for that the divineauthority and help, because it is a transitorylaw which we must some day overcome.Like the law of Polarity, it originated when

200

our involution into material consciousnessstarted, and it will disappear when we willhave evolved out of that state of conscious-ness. Take, for instance, that story in theBible, the dream of Pharaoh about the sevenfat cows and the seven lean cows which ateup the seven fat cows and still remainedlean. It was the law of Rhythm which thePharaoh perceived in a dream and whichJoseph was able to interpret correctly.Joseph was wise. He knew the operation ofthe law of Rhythm and how to overcome itand so he said: "During the seven prosperousyears gather and bring together all you can.That is, use the upward movement of the lawof Rhythm to the very limit in every direc-tion; and then when you will have receivedall which can be obtained during thoseseven prosperous years, when the years offamine, or the backward movement, willstart, you will have everything ready tomeet that backward movement, and beingprepared, you will thus overcome the law.We should and can do just the same andfollow the example of the Pharaoh. Whenthe forward movement of the law of Rhythmstarts, let us use its power in every possibledirection. No matter what we will endeavorto do during that time, it is bound to be asuccess, but when the backward movementstarts again, then we must be careful,watch, and refuse to be carried away bythat movement. The more we act that way,the more and more do we neutralize that

201

law, and by and by we will notice that thosebackward movements will become weakerand weaker till they will disappear entirely,leaving only the forward movements. Whenwe have reached that condition, the stormon the sea of our lives will come to an endand we can say we have mastered that lawof Rhythm; the negative operation of it willcease, leaving only the positive forcer whichthen will help us all the time. The followingdesign shows how the law of Rhythm oper-ates when consciously mastered.

It is very necessary for us to know thoselaws and their operation because we areseemingly so helpless when confronted withthem. People become so frightened bytheir manifestations that they grow super-stitious. Somebody says: "How well youlook," or, "How successful you are in yourbusiness?" Immediately most people wouldtap wood. Why? To counteract so callednegative influences. The superstition thatwe must tap wood was really brought onbecause people noticed that whenever acompliment about their good health orsuccess was made, soon some misfortunehappened to the one who was complimented.Back of all that trouble are those twotransitory laws, the law of Polarity and thelaw of Rhythm. Many superstitions werebrought forth to meet those laws, but inreality they were never able to do so. It is

202

only our mental attitude, the knowledge ofthe operation of the laws, and faith in ourGod-given power to overcome them, whichenable us to master those laws.

LAW OP GENDER: EVERYTHING INTHIS WORLD IN THE PRESENT STATE OFHUMAN CONSCIOUSNESS HAS TWO GEN-DERS, THE MALE AND THE FEMALEGENDER.The law of Gender expresses itself mostforcibly throughout the whole round ofCreation in the so-called opposite sexes,the male and the female. It is manifestednot only through human beings, but alsothrough animals, plants, minerals, electrons,electrical and magnetic currents, etc. Notonly on the physical plane does that law ofGender function; it is also manifested in themind of each human being, be it man orwoman. They have the two genders ex-pressed also in their mental selves. Themind of each individual has a Self-conscious-ness which belongs to the male gender, and aSub-consciousness which belongs to thefemale gender. These two are definitelyexpressing two sides of our individual minds.As the most important part of the processof thought operation is based on the law ofGender in the human mind, details about itwill be given in the sixth lesson, which dealswith Mind Force.

203

There is also a third constituent part inour mental selves, called the Super-con-sciousness, which will be taken up in theseventh lesson.In this lesson the law of Gender will beexplained in its operation through the funda-mental characteristics of what we call, inour present state of consciousness, the twoopposite sexes. We have now in Humanity,on one side Man, and on the other sideWoman, and these two are like two halves ofa sphere, which, when they come together,combine to form a whole sphere. Thegenerally accepted belief of today is thatthey unite for the purpose of procreation,to continue the human species on this Earth.No matter how important procreation mayappear, a still greater and higher purpose isthere for them to achieve. That ultimatepurpose is that by learning their lessonsthrough association, and by mutually de-veloping their latent complementary quali-ties, they may work out completeness withineach, after which they are automaticallyseparated. Yet after their separation theyare no longer the same as they were before.A great change has taken place within them.Before their meeting, they appeared ashalves, hut after the object of their associa-tion has been attained, they separatebecause each one of them has become aCOMPLETE SPHERE, In Man, who is theoutward expression of the male qualities,which are energy, self reliance, intellect,

204

etc., are also latent and ready tar expressionall the female qualities. On the other handlove, patience, intuition, gentleness, etc.,latent in men, whenever expressed as domi-nant qualities, manifest themselves in whatwe call Woman. Yet women have alsolatent within them all male qualities. Thisis so not only in the character of the indi-viduals, but also in their physical bodies.For instance, the embryo of a child, untilabout the fifth month of gestation, has thetwo sexes within itself physically expressed.Yet afterwards it develops one sex or theother, and thus determines the sex to whichit is born, boy or girl. Yet within the bodyof human beings are still discernible tracesof the opposite sex. As it is with our physicalbodies, so it is with our characters, and fromeach individual can be drawn out and devel-oped the latent complementary parts of theircharacters. The main purpose of marriage andin general of the association of men and wom-en is therefore to work out that development,to make them complete individual spheres,the image and likeness of the Infinite Sphere,called the Great Principle, the Absolute.In the first chapter of Genesis we read, "AndGod created Man in His image and likeness:male and female created He them." Only abeing possessing both qualities referred tocan be the perfect image and likeness of thePerfect One. That is the goal towardwhich each step in Humanity's Evolution isbringing us daily nearer and nearer.

205

The following diagrams show three pairsof halves, each half representing a man anda woman placed in a certain juxtapositionone to another, and forming three distinct

groups. The whole of human relations canbe classed under those three main headings.Yet each case is an individual one, and thereare no two alike. The first pair shows thetwo halves, man and woman, directly facing

206

each other, thus establishing between themas many connecting lines of Attraction, orLove, as their open surfaces allow. Whenin that relation, there is an irresistible draw-ing from one to another which unites theminto a complete sphere. It may happensometimes instantaneously, when two indi-viduals chance to bc in that relation one toanother. It is then called "love at firstsight." When the two seemingly becomeone, everything seems to he in commonbetween them-common interests, a commonaxis about which their lives rotate. Andwhen individuals are in that condition, theyfeel such an overwhelming sense of complete-ness and harmony that they call it perfectbliss, and because of it would never like topart even for a moment. The slightestseparation causes them intense suffering,because of the lack of the complementarypart. It is like an open wound when theyare put apart, and they are only happy whenthey are again together. And they expectto remain in that condition not only through-out this life but even throughout Eternity.When two individuals are in that relationto one another they are harmless, but alsouseless, to the rest of the world. They can-not help it. All their interests are centeredwithin themselves. Most of their energiesare used to keep those two halves together,the man to meet the demands of the woman,the woman to meet the demands of the man.They live in a world of their own and are

207

happy. The world around them does notexist for them. Naturally in such a casethey cannot express anything outside ofthemselves, and therefore one of the funda-mental Laws of the Universe, the Law ofAttraction, cannot operate outside of themas it should, for the Law of Attraction mustbe operating outside as well as inside inorder to keep everything in perfect equilib-rium and harmony. If the whole Universewould he filled with compound spheres ofthe above kind, nothing would be flowingfrom one sphere to another, each beingcentered in itself; and the Universe, deprivedof the cohesive power of Attraction, wouldfall to pieces. But the Great Law takes goodcare that such a condition shall be onlytransitory, and nothing but a stepping stoneto work out higher problems. When thetwo halves, man and woman, combine intoa sphere, those halves apparently fit eachother completely, but that is not the case.There is always some little space betweenthem where they are not completely adjusted.Compared with the great harmonization ofthe other qualities, that little maladjust-ment is almost unnoticed by them; yet inthat little space where they seemingly donot accord, and which forms a sort of avacuum, the latent complementary parts ofeach are growing in, because Nature doesnot permit a vacuum. The manifested malequalities of the man draw out of the womanher latent male qualities, because the law

208

says that "like attracts like." And themanifested female qualities of the woman,in their turn, draw out of the man his latentfemale qualities. Thus two incipient halvesare gradually growing out in that open spacebetween the two. The more they grow, themore independent of each other the twoindividuals become. This process of develop-ment is unfolding so gradually that neitherof them notices the change in their relationsone to another until they have become twocomplete spheres rotating around theirrespective axes, independent and free, yetstill most intimately related one to another.Then only do they realize that some funda-mental change has taken place within them,and their opened eyes perceive with amaze-ment that they have grown into a new andhigher condition. Their association hasachieved its purpose; the law has been ful-filled. Two complete beings have beenevolved from a half-developed condition,and brought to the Universe TO COOPERATECONSCIOUSLY IN THE GREAT ETERNALSCHEME.But a question may arise, Is all that love,that tender relation between them, goneonce and forever? No! By no means. Onthe contrary, never before did they feel agreater sense of love, a more intense feelingof completeness and harmony, than sincethey became complete individual spheres.When they were halves, they could expressone to another only the love of a half, but

209

the moment they became complete spheresthey expressed complete love to each otherin all its infinite manifestations. Beingcomplete spheres, and rotating around theirown individual axes, they continually seeone another in all their different aspects.It is like incessantly discovering in each othersome new and precious qualities. Naturally,under those conditions, their love becomesinfinitely greater and more perfect than' ithad ever been before. On account of theircompleteness they must also radiate loveto everyone and everything about them inevery direction, thus fulfilling the Law ofLove, of Universal Brotherhood. Then theybecome useful members of the Great HumanFamily, because they love everybody, onlythey will love their mate more, becausetheir relations are at the time the closest, oneto another. That is why they are calledmates, or affinities, or twin souls. But theirmutual love by no means excludes love toother beings also. Through incarnationafter incarnation we have all been workingout that problem of ours, by graduallydeveloping our inner qualities. Usually,when two individuals are in that positionfacing each other, as described above, it isdue to previous incarnations which preparedthem for that relation. That is why, whenthey meet, they cannot help but love eachother. When two such individuals haveworked out their completeness, and reacheda state of individual spheres, they do not

210

Think any more of their own happiness. AllTheir life, all their thoughts, all their love, isFor their mate’s or their friend’s happiness.They are never expecting anything in return,but, being complete spheres, it is inevitablethat they should receive in return as muchas they give. It is the highest love we canimagine now in our present state of con-sciousness, because it is a love which loves,not for what it can get, but for what it cangive. It is the nearest to the love ofDivinity, for Divinity also gives first, thenReceives. God first loved us; that is why we,in our turn, are to love Him. Even bodilyseparation or death cannot break such tiesonce they are established.Diagram number two shows anothergroup, much less harmonious, but much morecommon. There the man loves the womenwho does not reciprocate his love becauseher affections are fixed up on another man,who, in his turn, is indifferent to her.Under these circumstances it is much moredifficult to work out the completion,because there is no help whatsoever fromthe side of the corresponding party. Still,the problem of completion is solved, but in adifferent way. First the man, not havingthe woman’s manifested qualities directedtoward him to awaken within him the latentqualities of love and gentleness, has todraw out of himself, through his own efforts,stimulated by his love, the complementaryfemale qualities. Love does it. More and

211

more, because of the woman he loves, all thelatent female qualities, as love, patience,gentleness, intuition, etc., are brought outof that man by his love. It is a slow andpainful process, because he has to do italone, without the help of the woman heloves. Yet he does it, because he loves.When he has worked out his completion,his whole attitude toward that womanchanges. In the beginning it was selfish;but the more he loves, the less selfish hebecomes. At first he suffered because hislove was not answered, and was jealous ofthe other man to whom that woman wasgiving her love. The completeness onceattained, all these negative feelings disappearentirely, because he has found harmonywithin himself. Then he no longer thinksof his own happiness; he finds his happinessin the happiness of the woman he loves. Nosacrifice is too great for him, for he is achanged being.There is the woman, in love with anotherman, who is indifferent to her. She has alsoto work out the problem of her completionwithout the help and assistance of the manshe loves. Through love again is thatproblem solved. Her own love makes hermore self-reliant. and energetic, compels herto make greater use of her reasoning quali-ties, etc. And thus, through much hardwork, sorrow, and trouble, she becomeseventually a complete sphere. Then herwhole attitude changes. She begins to feel

212

toward the unresponsive object of her love amother's affection, caring for him withoutever expecting to get anything in return,entirely forgetting her own self for his sake.She also is then ready for any sacrifice,because she has worked out her completion.And when the two, the first man andwoman, have become complete spheres,their mutual relations are then also modified.To their surprise they discover that bonds oflove exist from both sides. They becomefriends, and the woman who spurned,perhaps for many years, the love which theman lavished upon her in such measure,begins in her turn to love him also. Whythat sudden change? Because, as a com-plete sphere, she cannot help but loveeverybody; and that first man, perhaps herhusband, being so close to her, naturallymust get the radiations of love emanatingfrom her in every direction.The third group represents two individ-uals, a man and a woman, who are married,yet turn their backs upon each other.Worldly considerations were probably thecause of their loveless marriage; or maybe itwas a match arranged by their parents, whodid not consult the personal feelings of thetwo chiefly concerned. Such a marriagemust be an unhappy one, and an utterfailure in regard to the problem of workingout their own individual completeness. Itis one of the most inharmonious of humanrelations, because it is unnatural, the Law

213

of Attraction, the Basic Law of the Universe,not finding expression in their mutualrelations. They are of no use one toanother, as they are turning their backs toeach other. Yet, as the problem of com-pletion must be worked out also in thatcase, they are seeking an affinity, a love,outside of their matrimonial ties. And whenthey have found somebody to love theyseparate, because they realize that otherwisehappiness would remain for them a meredream. Because of worldly considerations,it may take them many years before theymake that final decision, yet it is inevitable.Soon or late it must come, and the soonerthe better.That last group teaches human beings agreat lesson, that marriage is there to buildthe character, to develop Love to its highestmanifestation, and not to attain materialease and comfort.The problem of Completion is continuallyworked out in life through association ofindividuals one with another. Women con-stantly contribute to men some of theirqualities, and men do the same towardwomen. That is why co-education has somany strong points in its favor. Even theassociation of individuals of the same sexhas also its own beneficial results. Especiallylarge educational, social, and militarybodies play a very important role in thatrespect. There, individuals belonging todifferent classes in social life come together,

214

each one contributing some characteristic,some quality, to their fellow beings. Angles Iare rounded off, rough surfaces madesmooth, and individuals promoted a fewdegrees further toward completion.COMPLETION IS PERFECTION, and assuch is a very wonderful thing to seekand to strive for. But we must also realizethat a problem of that magnitude cannotbe worked out by individuals in the spanof one life. Many returns to Earth, manyreincarnations, are needed for each one ofus before we become perfect beings, theimage and likeness of that Supreme Being,the Source of all Perfection, Whom we callGod.

THE LAW OF CAUSE AND EFFECTEVERY EFFECT HAS ITS CAUSE AND EVERYCAUSE HAS ITS EFFECT.

This law pervades the three planes, thephysical, mental, and Spiritual. It is alaw which has its root in the Spiritual planebecause there is the First Great Cause, thePrinciple, the Basis of everything. Butthere also is the effect, the Universe. Onthe Spiritual plane, cause and effect aresimultaneous and instantaneous; there theyare so blended together that they cannotbe separated; but on the other planes thereis always a certain time, a period of space

215

between cause and effect, due to the humanconcept, in our present state of conscious-ness, of Time and Space. That law isoperating in this way; every time we startsomething, be it thought, word, or action,we create a certain cause which will some daymaterialize in a corresponding effect. If westart a positive cause, a right cause, therewill be in due time a positive effect, and viceversa. Just when that effect will take place,no one can tell; it depends upon manycircumstances; but it is unavoidably due,like a logical result in a mathematicalproblem. Whenever we have started acause, we are powerless over its effect, cannever change the effect. Yet human beingsdo not realize that at all, as is indicated inthe common belief that if people will regrettheir sins, they will be forgiven and usheredinto Heaven. That is an utter impossibilitybecause it is against the Law. if a personregrets a mistake, a sin, it is forgiven in thesense that there is always the possibility tomake it right, to start a new positive cause.But the penalty for the wrong is also alwaysthere, and that penalty it is impossibleto avoid because it is our own creation, theeffect of the cause we started coming back tous. And there we have the explanation ofthose words of Jesus in the Bible, when hesaid: "WHOSOEVER SOWETH THE WINDSHALL REAP THE WHIRLWIND." He knewthe law of Cause and Effect and He statedit, but naturally He could not explain that

216

law to the people who were living at thatperiod as scientifically as it can be explainednow. He presented it in another way. Heused the allegorical form, yet it was thesame law. When we know that law andapply that knowledge to our daily life, wecan shape our own destiny exactly as wewish it. Naturally we CANNOT straightenout past mistakes, hut we CAN TAKE THEMAS LESSONS.When those mistakes, those negativecauses, materialize into our lives as negativeeffects, those who are wise profit by theexperience of their mistakes, which thenbecome for them good lessons not to repeatthose mistakes. In order to use that lawsuccessfully in our lives, we must learn tohandle it properly. The first and mostimportant thing to do is TO LIVE IN THEEVER PRESENT NOW. What does thatmean? Are we not living right now? Yesand no. To live in the present NOW meansalways to do the best we can to start rightcauses NOW. Illogical and impractical asit is, yet most people live in the Future, withtheir hopes pinned to that Future. On theother hand, some people live with theremembrance of the Past; they are tied totheir dead Past. That also is not livingNOW. "NOW is the appointed time," do weread in the sacred Books. NIOW we must doeverything which is to be done; NOW is thevery wonderful and only moment for us tolive in-a moment which very often is not

217

at all understood by some, even of the greatphilosophers. They entirely disregard theNOW. They claim that NOW does not existbecause everything continually changes, is ina condition of perpetual becoming, and thattherefore it can never be NOW, but is eitherthe Past or the Future. If that were reallyso, we could never use constructively thelaws of Cause and Effect, as the Futurewould be always beyond our control.Therefore we would never be able consciouslyto build and direct our lives; we wouldalways bc slaves of Fate. In living NOW,in performing NOW our duties as they cometo us, we place ourselves in the followingposition. We are, so to speak, standing on aline of demarcation, on one side of us thePast, on the other side the Future, and infront of us the Present. In the Past wehave experience, in the Future all possibili-ties, but NOW is the time for us to act, toplant the good seed, to start positive causes,taking advantage of lessons of the Past soas to create the Future we desire. Some dayTOMORROW will become TODAY, theFuture will become Present, as time ismoving along. We alone are immovable inthat ever present NOW. Events are passingbefore our eyes as a film on a screen. Itis the film of our own life which we witnessNOW. We are both the audience and theactors, and our state of consciousness is thescreen on which we perceive everything.NOW is so marvelous because we perform in

218

it simultaneously two actions; we reap thePast and sow the Future. These two actionswe can perform continually only NOW. Thatis why NOW is so important and why NOWholds for us the key to our destiny. ThePast cannot be changed; we have to take itas it is. But our Future is completely inour hands, and, if we start the right causes,should never occasion us any worry, as itwill take care of. itself because of the law ofCause and Effect. When Jesus said: "Taketherefore no thought for the morrow, forthe morrow will take thought for the thingsof itself; sufficient unto the day is the evilthereof," He meant that we must NOW dothe right thing and then the Future will takecare of itself because of the law. It is un-avoidable and yet we realize it so little thatwe continually worry about the Future.Whenever we do anything, we wonder?"How will it come out?" Why should weworry? If we do the right thing, leave italone and it will come out all right, throughthe operation of the law of Cause and Effect.Worry is a leak through which energy iswastefully dissipated in the unknown voidof the Future instead of being constructivelyapplied in the Present. We can performreal action only on the plane on which weare living NOW in body, mind, and Soul.For the Great Principle, there is only oneplane, that of the EVER PPESENT NOW.There is no Past or Future for the Absolute,because It is all-inclusive, and when we

219

reach the highest state of consciousness therewill be the most complete sense of the EVERPRESENT NOW, as Past and Future will beOne with it. In the Bhagavad-Gita, Krishnais recorded as saying: "Do not think aboutthe fruit of your action; but perform action."That is the same as when Jesus told us notto worry about the next day. Do the rightthing today and the next day will take careof itself. That does not mean that we shouldcease planning. Naturally we should planthings; but when we plan them as well aswe can, when we have prepared the seed, ifwe have prepared a good seed and plantedit rightly, it will grow well. Never worryabout the result; there is the law back of it.That is why we must be satisfied with todayand not try to imagine or make certaincalculations that it will work out this orthat way. Usually our calculations will beupset because in worrying about the Futurewe do not give enough attention to thePresent. We cannot have the Great Lawoperating in the Future, the Great Lawbeing a Law of the ever present NOW.Neither the Past nor the Future can existfor that Great Law, because, like the GreatPrinciple Itself, it is an all-embracing Law,and is therefore always operating NOW.We make certain mistakes periodically,and then say, "Next time I am not going todo that," but when next time comes we do itagain. Why? Because of that law of Causeand Effect. Each time we make a mistake

220

we start a new cause for that mistake to berepeated, and usually, if we watch theseperiodical mistakes, we can see that wemake them at certain times or in meeting acertain kind of people, or on being confrontedwith certain similar conditions. So when-ever we feel that moment approaching andthe ground begins to be slippery, there wehave to watch, and, being determined not toyield to that mistake again, we will, throughthe conscious application of that law ofCause and Effect, destroy the negativecauses and stop the repetition of the negativeeffects. Instead, we have started a positivecause which will some day culminate in apositive effect. If we keep to that decisionto overcome imperfections, the law willcarry us through with harmonious results,and we will be able to correct by and by allour mistakes. They will never occur againbecause we are setting up new causes, har-monious causes, which will be then contin-ually expressed in corresponding new effects.On our life paths we very often stumble,we may even fall, yet we should neverworry about our stumbling or our falling.We should always bear in mind that it doesnot matter so much that we have fallen overan obstacle. The important fact is thatwe are on the other side of the obstacle,that we have advanced in spite of it. Thisis the main point to be always rememberedby us, and then the fall itself will not appearto be so hard.

221

The law of Cause and Effect, in itspresent aspect of a transitory, material law,is not harmful to us if we know how to use itproperly. If we only do the right thing wecan use it in such a way that it will alwayswork with positive results. That law explainsalso what is called Reincarnation. Why dosome individuals come to this Earth tosuffer and others to enjoy? If for somereason they could not get all they deservedfor their good or evil deeds in one incarna-tion, in one life on Earth, then they mustcome back to this plane again in order toget it in another life. In other words, theycome to this Earth as children go to school;it is indeed the School of Life, where alllessons must be learned and all mistakescorrected. Then only are we ready for somehigher and greater work. This explanationis the only logical one which completelydoes away with that seeming injustice inthe destiny of human beings. In any ease,it certainly is more acceptable than thetheory of eternal bliss and eternal punish-ment.This last law of Cause and Effect closesthe cycle of the Seven Laws. Two moreLaws will be given, making nine, the Lawof Love and the Law of Evolution. TheseLaws, although direct emanations from, andcomprehended in, the first of the Laws ofthe Absolute, are given separately, at theend of this lesson on Laws, in order toemphasize the fact that no matter how

222

strong the Negative, with its transitorylaws, may appear to us, the Positive, withits Eternal Laws, is nevertheless supreme.It is the Beginning and the End of every-thing.

THE LAW OF LOVE: NO MATTER UNDERWHAT CIRCUMTACE, ALWAYS MEETEVERYTHING AND EVERYBODY WITHLOVE.

All great teachers of Humanity havealways had their teachings based on Love.They loved human beings, and they taughthuman beings how to love. People usuallysee in those teachings only the emotional,the altruistic, the ideal, yet how few realizethe immense practical value and the realscience back of them. Let us analyze now,from the scientific point of view, why thecontinual application of that Law is one ofthe most important means for our evolution.We have an immutable Law which says"Everything is Vibration," and thereforeLove also is a certain kind of vibration. Butso is hatred, jealousy, etc. Suppose anindividual sends to us a negative thoughtvibration of hatred or jealousy. That unitof negative vibrations penetrates into us,and because of the Law of Vibration,arouses in us the corresponding unit ofnegative vibrations. Having in us two unitsof negative vibrations, we feel uncomfort-

223

able, and we throw them back to the indi-vidual who first sent to us the thought ofhatred or jealousy. Again because of theLaw of Vibration, they arouse in thatindividual two corresponding negative vibra-tions. He in his turn, disliking to feel fourunits of negative thought vibrating withinhim, throws them back at us. Receivingthis time four negative units, which arousewithin us a corresponding four, we sendback eight. He gets eight, and sends backto us sixteen. We, on our side, return himthirty-two, etc., the number of units ofnegative vibrations exchanged increasingthus in geometrical progression. When bothsides have reached the limit of endurancein that direction they explode; that is, theysuddenly throw off all the negative vibra-tions accumulated in each one of them, andthat explosion means fight. The fight maybe with acts, with words, with looks, oreven with thoughts. In any case, it is afight, which results in injury to both sides.That is the ordinary way, among humanbeings, of eliminating their negative vibra-tions-certainly not a practical way, afterall, because it always weakens both parties,and sometimes injures them beyond repair.That proves that retaliation, as stated inthe law of Moses, which says "An eye for aneye and a tooth for a tooth," and which is sogenerally accepted by human beings, is notthe best method of solving that problem.Now, whenever we apply the Law of Love

224

in a similar case, we obtain there entirelydifferent results. An individual may sendto us negative vibrations, thoughts ofhatred and jealousy. According to theLaw of Vibration, they will arouse in us thecorresponding negative vibrations. Yet ifwe remember the Law of Love, we can meetthose negative vibrations with Love, con-sciously brought forth within us. As thePositive always destroys the Negative,which has no power over it, the positivevibrations always destroy the negativevibrations sent from that individual. Afterthey have destroyed these negative vibra-tions, they reach the individual himself,and arouse within him the correspondingvibrations of love. Though surprised at theway we retaliated, the individual may sendus another discharge of negative vibrations,which we meet again in the same way. Andagain the positive vibrations of Love proceed-ing. from us will do their pacifying workwithin the other individual. He may senda few more discharges of negative vibra-tions, the number of which will depend onthe strength of the negative passion whichis governing him at that time. But we,meeting them always with Love, finallydestroy all the reserves of the negativevibrations which the individual possesses atthat moment. And the individual, because ofthe Law of Love, begins to feel in theirstead peace and harmony, and sometimeseven love. All the negative seems as if

225

wiped out, and replaced by the positive.Often the individual, out of stubbornness,does not want to admit it, because he thinksthat by so doing he acknowledges defeat;but in reality there was no defeat whatso-ever, on either side. On the contrary, Lovecarried the victory to both.The above cited example shows howinfinitely superior and more practical isLove than retaliation, yet how few peoplerealize its practicability and its universaluse. They consider it a weakness, a lackof manliness, not to strike back when theyare struck. On the contrary, it is muchmore difficult, and requires greater selfcontrol and more developed will power, tostand those continual attacks of negativevibrations, and to meet and overcome themby vibrations of Love. The more we applythat Law of Love in our lives, the strongerwe become on our positive side, and thegreater is the harmony within us, untilfinally we reach a condition of such harmonythat no negative vibration of any kind canever touch us more because there is nolonger in us a response to anything negative.Then only everything positive will come tous. Each human being will some day haveto learn that Law of Love, because it is theonly way, the quickest and the easiest, todo away with wars, revolutions, strikes,domestic troubles, and all kinds of disagree-ments and misunderstandings among humanbeings. Then peace will be established on

226

this Earth, not as something imposed fromwithout by a stronger nation, but as some-thing from within, an inherent part of eachhuman being. And as nations are made upof individuals, when the individual will beable to express peace and good will towardother men, nations will then manifest on alarge scale what each citizen does on a smallscale. Then the whole Human Familywill be at peace, and peace will reign on thisEarth. How true, how scientific, ring downto us through the centuries those lovingwords of the One Who was Love, "LOVEYOUR ENEMIES, BLESS THEM THAT HATEYOU, DO GOOD TO THEM THAT DESPITE-EIJLLY USE YOU"Those who have attained the highest onthe path of Love, when they reach thatcondition where nothing but love comes tothem from everywhere and from everybody,are then ready for the final test of Love.Jealousy, hatred, malice, all evil passions,are thrown at them again, but this time notto awaken within them the correspondingcharacteristics which no longer vibratewithin them. All negative, all evil, comesto them for liberation from its own selffor transmutation into good. The LifeEnergy, pure and harmonious, imprisonedas in a shell in every negative act, thought,or emotion, is irresistibly attracted towardthose who are the luminaries of Love.Unconsciously it feels that only they aregreat enough to pierce with the arrows of

227

Love that negative shell around it, to liber-ate it and thus transmute evil into good.There is no higher and greater work toperform on this plane than the transmutationof evil into good, and those who are able todo it justly deserve to he called the Savioursof the World. It is usually with their livesthat they pay the price for that transmuta-tion, for that service they render to Human-ity. But is there an effort too great, aprice too high, to pay for the liberation ofHumanity from the bonds of Evil? Humanhatred, jealousy, and all the other evilpassions, like a great wave, lifted Jesus tothe Cross. As a deadly arrow, they trans-fixed the human body of Krishna. and causedHis mortal self to die. They persecutedBuddha, and every other lesser teacher whoever taught Humanity the Law of Love.As in the days of old, so in modern timesthe same fact repeats itself. It is the age-old Evil which comes continually for libera-tion from its own negative qualities. AndLove, gentle yet strong, presses to its heartthose thorny branches of Evil, and with itswarmth, its tenderness, makes them burstforth into beautiful blossoms of Love.

THE LAW OF EVOLUTION: ALL VIBRA-TIONS TEND TO RISE UPWARD IN THESCALE OF ETERNAL HARMONY.

The Law of Evolution, that saving ray of

228

the Great Law, expresses itself on the threeplanes, the physical, the mental, and theSpiritual. When on the Spiritual plane, itappears as Eternal Unfoldment. When seenthrough the physical or mental lens, itsevolutionary action is called Progress. Thewind which whirls the dust from the ground,and carries it up into the air, is governed bythat Law. It proceeds in spirals, the spiralbeing the form through which the Lawoperates. The cyclone on dry land, thetyphoon on the sea, are governed by thesame Law. Whenever left to themselves tooperate normally, all vibrations tend natu-rally to rise upward. It is only through con-scious or unconscious perversion that thisupward tendency can be reversed. Evilitself is nothing but the reversed upwardmovement of good. Positive vibrations,whenever reversed in their ever ascendingand unfolding course, become negative, andassume then all those characteristics whichare called "1. If it were not for the Lawof Evolution, the laws of Rhythm and Polar-ity would have kept Humanity in theirclutches eternally. Yet no matter how muchthose laws, especially the law of Rhythm,try to throw us back to the point from whichwe started, they do not succeed because ofthat Law of Evolution. There is always alittle gain on the side of the Positive, dueto the continual operation of that eternalHelpmate of ours. We call it hope, as italways carries us beyond our own human

229

selves, remains with us, sustains and up-lifts us, when everything else seems to havedeserted us. It is like the last string ofthat great Lyre called Human Life, which,when the rest are broken, still strikes intoour hearts new courage to continue thestruggle and to win our fight. Being a Law,and an eternal one, it is not only Hope thatthe Law of Evolution brings to us, but alsothe assurance. that no matter what mayhappen, SUCCESS and TRIUMPH are ourseventually.

230

LESSON FIVE1. QUES. How many laws govern the

Universe in the Absolute?ANS. One Universal, All-Inclusive Law

called the Great Law.2. QUES. How many laws govern this

World in the present state ofhuman consciousness?

ANS. Seven Laws, of which three areimmutable, eternal, Laws of theAbsolute, and four are transitory,mutable, laws of the Relative.

3. QUES. Why are there three Laws of theAbsolute?

ANS. Because of the Triune State ofthe present human conscious-ness, through which the OneUniversal Great Law appears inthree aspects.

4. QUES. What are the three Laws of theAbsolute?

ANS. First: Life, Mind, Truth, Love,Spirit, is All in All. Second: TheSame Law governs always every-thing, everywhere, in the sameway, from the greatest star downto the smallest electron. Third:Everything is Vibration.

5. QUES. What does the first of the Lawsof the Absolute mean?

ANS. It means the All-ness of theGreat Principle.

6. QUES. What does the second of theLaws of the Absolute stand for?

231

ANS. It stands for the Universality ofthe Great Law.

7. QUES. What does the third of the Lawsof the Absolute mean?

ANS. It means Infinite and EternalActivity.

8. QUES. What attitude has one to take inregard to those Laws of theAbsolute?

ANS. One has to attune, to harmonize,oneself with them.

9. QUES. What practical result does thatbring?

ANS. An ever-increasing sense of free-dom and actual power.

10. QUES. What results are brought aboutby the transgression of thoselaws?

ANS. Disharmony and loss of allpower.

11. QUES. Are those Laws of the Absoluteinferior to the Great PrincipleItself?

ANS. No, because they are an integralpart of the Great Principle, andare the means by which Itgoverns the Universe.

12. QUES. What are the four laws of theRelative?

ANS. They are the laws of Polarity, ofRhythm, of Gender, and ofCause and Effect.

13. QUES. Why are they called transitorylaws?

232

ANS. Because they were brought intoexistence by Mind ( Lucifer) him-self, and must therefore be alsodestroyed by Mind.

14. QUES. How did they first come intoexistence?

ANS. Mind (Lucifer) claiming to be apower by himself, constituted aseeming power aside from AllPower. Thus was the law ofPolarity brought into existence.Out of the law of Polarity grewall the other laws of the Relative.

15. QUES. What power have those lawsnowadays?

ANS. They rule Humanity with. a rodof iron, and try to stop allprogress.

16. QUES. What attitude should one havetowards those laws?

ANS. One should learn how to masterthem.

17. QUES. What will be the practical resultof mastering those laws?

ANS. Freedom, power, and dominionover all.

18. QUES. By what means can that beachieved?

ANS. By actually living the Laws ofthe Absolute. Their power willovercome all the limitations im-posed by the laws of the Relative.

19. QUES. How does the law of Polarityread?

233

ANS. "Everything in this World in thepresent state of human conscious-ness appears to have two poles,the positive and negative poles."

20. QUES. What does the law of Polaritymean?

ANS. It means perpetual disharmonydue to the continual fight of thetwo principles, the Positive andthe Negative.

21. QUES. How does one overcome it?ANS. By always casting one's weight

in the scale of the Positive.22. QUES. How can one enforce positive

statements?ANS. By hacking them up with the

following words: "With the helpof God" or "With the help of theGreat Law."

23. QUES. Why are those words so powerful?ANS. Because neither God nor His

Great Law have any opposites.24. QUES. Has the Negative any power

over the Positive?ANS. In reality it has not, because of

its non-existence, but in thepresent state of human conscious-ness it has to the extent that oneconcedes that power to it.

25. QUES. Why has the Negative suchpower over human beings?

ANS. Because they believe in it andutterly fear it.

26. QUES. How can that power be destroyed?

234

ANS. First, by discovering it; second,by knowing that it is not danger-ous;and finally, by realizing thatit has no existence or root in theAbsolute.

27. QUES. What statement did Krishnamake about the law of Polarity?

ANS. That God is above it.28. QUES. What was the comment of Jesus

concerning it?ANS. That the Law of God is the Only

Power.29. QUES. Why is it difficult to keep a

secret?ANS. Because of the law of Polarity.

30. QUES. Why is there an inevitable re-action to each action?

ANS. Because of the law of Polarity.31. QUES. What are the causes of indecision?

ANS. The law of Polarity.32. QUES. How does the law of Rhythm

read?ANS. "Everything in this World in

the present state of human con-sciousness inhales and exhales,goes up and down by com-pensated oscillations."

33. QUES. What is the operation of thelaw of Rhythm on the largestknown scale?

ANS. In the progress and retrogressionof Humanity.

34. QUES. How does it affect individualnations?

235

ANS. They rise and fall? to rise and fallagain, repeatedly, until they havelearned how to overcome thatlaw.

35. QUES. How does the law affect individ-uals?

ANS. By bringing into their life periodsof success alternating with pe-riods of failure.

36. QUES. How can that law be overcomein individual life?

ANS. By taking all possible advantagesof its ascending forward move-ment, and by being determinednot to he carried away during itsbackward and downward move-ment.

37. QUES. Should one keep to the matterone has on hand, even throughthe backward movement of thelaw of Rhythm?

ANS. Yes, but one should carefullyavoid starting anything new dur-ing that period, as it is bound tobe a failure.

38. QUES. What is the best general attitudeduring the backward movementof the law of Rhythm?

ANS. Optimism, coupled with increasedactivity.

39. QUES. What changes are brought aboutin one's life by mastering thelaw of Rhythm?

236

ANS. Success without periodical fail-ures.

40. QUES. Have those who have achievedsuccess in their life mastered thelaw of Rhythm?

ANS. Yes.41. QUES. Does the law of Rhythm mani-

fest itself also on the physicalplane?

ANS. Yes, throughout all Nature. Itsoperation is especially noticeablein a body of water during a storm.

42. QUES. What does the Biblical story ofthe dream of the Pharaoh, aboutthe seven cows, explained byJoseph, refer to?

ANS. To the law of Rhythm.43. QUES. What is the law of Gender?

ANS. An aspect of the law of Polarity.44. QUES. How does it read?

ANS. "Everything in this World inthe present state of human con-sciousness has two genders, themale and female gender."

45. QUES. How does it operate?ANS. Through the influence of one

gender upon the other.46. QUES. What is the real purpose of

marriage?ANS. The building up of character by

mutual development of the com-plementary characteristics.

47. QUES. According to the law of Gender,what are human beings?

237

ANS. They are half-individuals, whoseek completion through marriage.

48. QUES. Do men and women alreadypossess, in a latent state, theircomplementary qualities?

ANS. Yes. Each man possesses latentfemale qualities, and each womanlatent male qualities.

49. QUES. What happens to two individualswho have worked out their mutualcompletion?

ANS. They become independent,strong, and more loving, becauseof their inner completion.

50. QUES. Which is the easiest way to workout that completion?

ANS. Through marriage based onmutual love.

51. QUES. If the love is on one side only,can the problem of completionbe worked out?

ANS. Yes, but with much greaterdifficulty.

52. QUES. What chance for completion havethose who married only for world-ly considerations?

ANS. None whatsoever. Therefore thesooner they part, the better it isfor them.

53. QUES. Is completion worked out insome other way?

ANS. Yes. In general, through associa-tion with other individuals, be itmen or women.

238

54. QUES. Does it also affect children?ANS. Yes. That is why co-education is

desirable.55. QUES. How does the law of Gender

express itself through the humanMind?

ANS. Through the Self-consciousness,the male, and the Sub-conscious-ness, the female of the humanMind.

56. QUES. Does every individual, be it manor woman, have the two gendersin their respective minds?

ANS. Yes.57. QUES. What is the law of "Cause and

Effect" and how does it read?ANS. "Every effect has its cause and

every cause has its effect."58. QUES. Has the law of Cause and Effect

any connection with the Laws ofthe Absolute?

ANS. Yes. It has its roots in theAbsolute, but, Cause and Effectbeing instantaneous and simul-taneous there, its operation isentirely different from its modeof expression as a transitory law.

59. QUES. Why does it express itself differ-ently as a transitory law?

ANS. Because of our present limitedconcept of Time and Space.

60. QUES. How does that law affect humanbeings?

ANS. It shapes their destiny.

239

61. QUES. Can man himself change hisdestiny?

ANS. Yes, by continually starting posi-tive causes, which will culminatein positive effects.

62. QUES. Has one control over the Pastand the Future?

ANS. None over the Past, all over theFuture.

63. QUES. Of what use is the Past?ANS. It stands as a lesson to us for

the Present.61. QUES. Which is the most important

time on which to center all one'sthoughts and energies?

ANS. The ever-present NOW.65. QUES. Why is that NOW so important?

ANS. Because it stands for theAbsolute, Which includes in Itselfthe Past, Present, and Future.

66. QUES. What actions does one continuallyperform in the ever-present NOW?

ANS. One reaps the Past, and sows theFuture.

67. QUES. Can the effect of a cause oncestarted be avoided?

ANS. No. The law itself prevents it.68. QUES. What is the operation of the

law of Cause and Effect in whatis called reincarnation?

ANS. In their successive reincarnationshuman beings reap the effectsof causes they started in previousones.

240

69. QUES. Does that explain why somehuman beings are born with allkinds of limitations, and otherswith all advantages, some tosuffer, others to enjoy?

ANS. Yes. It is all due to the operationof the law of Cause and Effect,which follows human beingsthrough their successive lives,and exacts from them the lastfarthing.

70. QUES. Can prayer modify the opera-tion of that law?

ANS. No. There is no pleading withthe law. But prayer can giveone strength to start positivecauses in spite of negative effects,and thus change the Future.

71. QUES. How did Jesus formulate thatlaw?

ANS. "With what measure ye mete, itshall be measured to you again."

72. QUES. What are the practical advan-tages of the knowledge of thatlaw?

ANS. It does away with worries byenabling one to control one'sFuture in starting positive causes,which because of that law arebound to culminate in correspond-ing positive effects.

73. QUES. Is the cycle of the Seven Lawsclosed by that law of Cause andEffect?

241

ANS. Yes.74. QUES. What is the Law of Love and

the Law of Evolution?ANS. Two divine rays of the Great

Law sent down to Earth to helphumanity.

75. QUES. How does the Law of Love read?ANS. "No matter under what circum-

stances, always meet everythingand everybody with Love.''

76. QUES. What is the practical advantageof that Law?

ANS. It destroys the Negative andstrengthens the Positive as wellwithin as without the individualwho uses it.

77. QUES. Can it overcome all Negative?ANS. Yes, because Love is that Infin-

ite, Universal Power which hasno equal. Love is both the Lawand the fulfillment of the Law.

78. QUES. Why does the Negative still cometo those who have risen to thehighest in the Positive?

ANS. Because in those instances itseeks transmutation, release fromits own negative condition, whichcan be achieved only through theLaw of Love.

79. QUES. What is the Law of Evolution?ANS. It is the last string of the great

Lyre of human life, and is alsocalled Hope.

80. QUES. How does it read?

242

ANS. "All vibrations tend to riseupward in the scale of EternalHarmony.

81. QUES. What is its practical value inhuman life?

ANS. It always lifts those who arefallen, and gives hope to thosewho are discouraged. Being aray of the Great Law, it con-tinually opposes itself to theoperation of the law of Polarityand Rhythm, and thus counter-acts, in a certain measure theirnegative effects.

82. QUES. What is Evil?ANS. Evil is but the negation of the

Law of Evolution. It is thereversed, backward movement ofpositive vibrations.

243

244

245

N this present stage ofEvolution it becomes vitallyimportant for Humanity tohave a thorough knowledgeof the Mind, and of the laws

that govern it. Evil---that is, the con-scious or unconscious violation of the Lawsof the Absolute, due to the reversal of thenatural ascending movement of all vibra-tions-----originated in Mind. Mind, from itsmental plane, is sending its pervertedvibrations into the physical, or magnetic,plane. It is Mind which, when misused,debases Life, and it is the problem ofMind to regenerate Life, through theproper use of Knowledge. It is on the plane

246

of Mind that all mistakes must be corrected,that all evil must be transmuted into good,because it is on this plane that the firstnegative vibrations started, and thereforemust also die away. Mind has a higher rateof vibration, and hence greater power, ina way, than Life. Being aware of its ownexistence, it can consciously concentrateand direct its own powers wherever it wishes.When Self-Consciousness enters the ordinaryMagnetic Vibrations it raises them to acertain height and changes the whole oftheir nature, making them conscious oftheir own existence. At that point theycease to be called Life Energy, and areoperating under the name of Mind Force.In other words, the first manifestation ofSelf-conscious Magnetic Vibrations is calledMental Vibrations, whose various combina-tions constitute thoughts. As for the Mag-netic Force within the body, the solar plexusis acting as a distributing agent for it. Withthe Mind Force, it is the brain which per-forms this office. Ideas are formed in Mind,which, working through the brain, trans-lates those ideas into thoughts, and conveysthem to a certain gland located at about thecenter of the forehead, whence they areprojected into Space as Mental Vibrations.This gland is called the Pituitary Body, orTelepathic Apparatus, and its function isto send out and receive simultaneouslyMental Vibrations. The Ancients, especiallythe Hindus, knew this function of the Pitui-

247

tary Body, which they called the Bump ofWisdom, or the Eye of Siva Mind, Lucifer).Very often their divinities and saints wererepresented in painting and sculpture withthat Bump of Wisdom, a glowing preciousstone sometimes marking its place. ThePituitary body, or Telepathic Apparatus,is a most wonderfully constructed sendingand receiving station for Mental Vibrations.It is infinitely delicate and sensitive, so thatit can perceive the slightest vibrations, atthe greatest distance, and at the same timeit is strong enough to send out vibrations of apower which has no equal on this materialplane. The wireless stations which sendtheir messages throughout the world operateon the same principle .as the Pituitary Body.Only this Telepathic Apparatus, whendeveloped, is incomparably more effectivethan the best wireless station. The ordinaryMental Vibrations proceed from the Tele-pathic Apparatus in so-called spheric waves-that is, like 'rays of light darting from acentral point, and forming around thatpoint an ever increasing sphere whoseboundaries are restricted only by the mag-netic attraction of the Earth, thus creating akind of mental atmosphere surrounding thisglobe, So it is with all vibrations, becausethey are all governed in the same way bythe Great Law. That peculiarity of vibra-tions in general explains why the ordinarythought is perceptible only at a short dis-tance, Every thought vibration starting

248

from the Telepathic Apparatus is sent ininnumerable mental rays, in all directionsfrom it. Each mental message has itsparticular vibratory rate which, when itimpinges upon the Telepathic Apparatusof another individual, is immediately trans-lated into the original thought just as thedots and dashes of the Morse Code aretranslated into the words of the message bythe wireless operator. A certain amount ofenergy is used for every individual thought.That energy is embodied in each mental rayof a thought, and manifests itself also asthe attraction which holds those rays togeth-er, thus forming the above mentioned mentalsphere. When starting from the TelepathicApparatus, that sphere of Mental Vibra-tions is small, but its size increases almostinstantaneously, because of the forwardmovement of the Primal Energy embodiedin its component rays. Though the amountof original energy in each thought is notincreased, yet the size of each mentalvibratory sphere grows to almost unlimitedproportions, and the same amount ofenergy has to cover this ever increasingarea, thus weakening the Mental Vibra-tions to such an extent that they becomealmost imperceptible. This is why, whennear to a center of such ordinary mentalactivity, one can easily perceive it-aperception which is completely lost at acertain distance, for the reasons statedabove. The mental atmosphere surround-

249

ing this Earth is made of infinite varietiesof these ordinary Mental Vibrations, whichare called "THOUGHT DUST." They areimperceptible, because they are so diluted.Yet even that "thought dust" becomes avaluable substance when placed in contactwith the concentrated thought. It is thenthe very element which makes that secondkind of thought grow and increase in powerduring its projection through Space. Inorder to make a thought strong, and enableit to reach, as rays of light sent from aprojector, any individual, no matter how farremoved he may be, the spheric vibrationsof the ordinary thought must be concen-trated into a single ray, made one-pointed,thus sending all their power in one directioninstead of letting it radiate in all directions.The way to proceed is as follows: Firstmake the mental contact with UniversalLife Energy, as indicated in Lesson II.When the Life Force is felt to flow, take asimple thought, a concrete object beingpreferable to an abstract one, at least forbeginners. For instance, take a flower, acarnation. Then with a conscious, sustainedeffort of will power, concentrate the mindon that thought of the carnation. Those whodo not know much about the mastery ofMind will find it rather difficult at first todo this. All kinds of extraneous thoughtswill all the time flash through their mindsand thus divert their attention from theoriginal thought of the carnation. One has

250

to watch that mind continually, and by theconstant exercise of will power bring itback to the thought on which it is to beconcentrated. By and by the mind, sorestless and difficult to curb in the beginning,will become more docile and obedient. Con-centration is a science in itself, and can beattained only through patience, persever-ance, and the continual exercise of willpower. When the mind has been so trainedthat it can remain concentrated for anylength of time on a certain object, be itconcrete or abstract, then the work of con-centration has been properly carried out.The mental image of the carnation, men-tioned above, must become so real, so tangi-ble, that one should be able to see it, tofeel it, to smell it, mentally, just as if itwere an actual flower. When that is achieved,the next step is to be taken. Still holdingbefore the mental eye the concentratedthought of the carnation, inhale deeply,thus lifting the diaphragm and expandingthe solar plexus. Having reached the climaxof inhalation, think for one instant aboutthe person to whom that concentratedthought is to be sent. That quick thought isnothing but an ordinary thought which doesnot interfere with the concentrated one, andwhich can be sent out from the TelepathicApparatus without diverting the mind fromthe concentrated thought. The ordinarythought, through its spheric expansion, willinstantaneously reach the limits of this

251

Earth, and will somewhere contact theperson to whom the concentrated thought ofthe carnation is to he sent. That contact,once established, connects that person withthe operator by an invisible mental line.After that, exhale, and in that moment letthe concentrated thought of the carnationgo. The exhalation contracts the solarplexus, which then sends through the spinalnerve and brain to the Pituitary Body theLife Force which is needed to vitalize andpropel the concentrated thought. In amoment of strong desires or passion thewhole process, including concentration, isdone automatically, which accounts for theheavy breathing during such times. Thatis why thoughts sent in those momentscarry with them such constructive or de-structive powers. The one-pointed thought,filled with Life Energy, will dart like light-ning from the Pituitary Body into Space,and because of the physical law which says"all elements choose the path of leastresistance," it will follow the invisiblemental line already established between thetwo parties by the ordinary thought. Theconcentrated, one-pointed thought will reachthe person, no matter how far away he maybe, and will strike his Telepathic Apparatus.If the individual is not concentrating hismind upon some other thought at that time,he will become conscious of the thought ofthe carnation. The law of Gender, explainedin the fifth lesson, is continually operating

252

also in the human mind. According to thatlaw all human beings, both men and women,have each of them their minds manifestingthe two genders, the male and the female.The Self-consciousness belongs to the malegender, and the Sub-consciousness to thefemale gender. All thought emanating fromthe Self-consciousness therefore belongs tothe male gender. The one-pointed thoughtproceeding from the Telepathic Apparatusof an individual is naturally attracted to,and strikes, the corresponding Apparatus inanother individual, which acts like a wirelessreceiving station. This is the first action ofthe one-pointed thought. After the con-centrated thought of the carnation hasreached the other person's TelepathicApparatus, and produced there its impres-sion, exactly as in the receiving station ofthe wireless, it does not stay there. Itpenetrates into the Sub-consciousness, thefemale mental self of the individual, andthere it acts like a seed planted in theground. It is important to note, in regardto the reception of the mental message bythe Telepathic Apparatus, that all thoughtsare usually recorded exactly as they arereceived, without any increase or decrease,just as in the case of wireless messages. Butwhen the concentrated thought of thecarnation has penetrated into the otherindividual's Sub-consciousness, it begins togrow there like an ordinary seed thrown intothe soil. The more Life Energy there was

253

conveyed into the one-pointed thoughtduring the exhalation and contraction of thesolar plexus, the more vital that seed willbecome, and the stronger the growth of themental plant springing from that seed willbe. There the law of Gender has its fullsway. The Sub-consciousness, the femaleof the mental Self, exercises the function ofits gender, increasing and multiplying bymany times the seed thrown into it. It isalmost incredible how much the Sub-consciousness can develop and increase astrong thought seed thrown into it. In itsturn, the thought seed acts like an ordinaryseed. It puts forth a sprout, and sends downa root. The root penetrates deeper anddeeper into the soil of the Sub-consciousness,and the sprout grows up through it into theSelf-consciousness of the individual, who atthat moment becomes aware of that thoughtplanted in his Sub-consciousness. Then theindividual again begins to entertain thesame thought, but in a different way. It isno longer a casual thought, forgotten in amoment, Continual thinking of it takes theplace of casual thought, as from the Sub-consciousness similar thoughts are all thetime being sent into the Self-consciousnessof the individual. The Sub-consciousness isyielding the harvest which the Self-conscious-ness reaps. In the aforesaid instance of theconcentrated thought of the carnation,that thought seed, thrown into the field ofthe Sub-consciousness of the person to

254

whom that thought was sent, will growthere and develop in the manner justexplained. Then that individual will becomeconscious of that thought of the carnation ina most unusual way. He will no longerthink of one carnation, but of a whole fieldof them, and of every kind. For some timehis whole mind will be occupied by carna-tions, and the richer the harvest, the longerhe will think of them. That female qualityof the Sub-consciousness explains the neces-sity of guarding against the intrusion intoit of undesirable thoughts. The Self-con-sciousness can, with comparative ease,destroy any undesirable thoughts merelyby denying them, so long as they have notyet penetrated into the Sub-consciousness.But once penetrated there, they become toodeeply rooted to be easily removed. Thatis why one must be an alert sentinel at thismental door. Chronic troubles of any kindare usually due to that very reason; anduntil the disharmonious mental growth isextracted with all its roots, no permanentcure can be obtained. From what has beensaid above, it is evident that the more LifeEnergy there is embodied in the thought,the stronger the results will be. Thatexplains why some individuals, devoid ofany oratorical talent or harmony of speech,are nevertheless able to produce a deepimpression on their audiences, while on theother hand some individuals seeminglyendowed with all qualities to captivate their

255

listeners, even if they please their audiencesfor the time being do not impress themlastingly. Lack of vitality is the cause of it.They have not sufficient life energy withinthemselves, or don't know how to contact itoutside themselves, in order to produce onthe public an abiding impression. As ageneral rule, simple, short thoughts givebetter results than long, complicated ones,because of that peculiarity of the Sub-con-sciousness, of breaking up into their corn-ponent parts all such compound thoughts.A complex thought being thus divided, itsstrength is proportionally lessened. TheSub-consciousness, being below the Self-conscious status, rears and develops withoutdiscrimination any kind of thought, thenegative as well as the positive. It is thefield in which wheat and tares are growingtogether, until the day of harvest, when theSelf-consciousness makes a selection andthrows away the tares, keeping the wheat.In that scientific mental work, every actionis based upon and governed by a mentallaw. Therefore there is no need to worry ordoubt that proper results will be obtained,as long as the mental law is rightly applied.It is just as exact in its results as is the solu-tion of a mathematical problem according tothe laws of mathematics. That secondoperation of the same thought is a veryimportant one in Mental Science, because ofthe extraordinary results obtained through

256

Last comes the third operation of thesame thought. Of all three, it is the leastknown, and at first sight, seems the leastimportant. Yet it is of the greatest impor-tance, especially to the operator, because itconcerns him directly and most vitally.After the thought has accomplished its pro-creative function in the Sub-consciousness,it does not remain there. It proceeds further,and again like a ray it darts into Space.There that concentrated. one-pointedthought, full of Life Energy, proceeds at anincredible speed through Space, and goesas far as the Earth magnetic attractionpermits it. The more Life Force there wasembodied in that thought, the further itwill go, and the stronger power of attractionit will develop. Because of that inherentquality of attraction, that living, concen-trated mental ray, flashing through Spacewhich is filled with "thought dust," attractsto it loose particles of the ordinary sphericthought vibrations, the product of thinkingHumanity. Thought particles of the samerate of vibration, if the same kind andcharacter, are attracted to that mentalmagnet which is the one-pointed thought.And that thought, rushing through Space,thus grows continually bigger and stronger.When the propulsive power embodied in thethought at the moment of its start from theTelepathic Apparatus has finally beenneutralized by the Earth attraction, theone-pointed thought-ray is then compelled

257

by that physical law to turn back, andreturn to its starting point. Like an ordinaryprojectile, it describes its course in an ellipse.It acts like a boomerang, that peculiarlyshaped weapon made of light wood curvedin a certain way, which the Australiannatives use especially to hunt birds. Throwninto the air, after it has reached its mark theboomerang returns to the thrower. Theone-pointed thought is indeed a boomerang.It finally always returns to the one who sentit. And on its backward course the con-centrated thought, passing always throughthe "thought dust" of this planet, stillgrows and grows, so that when it finallycomes back to the one that first sent it, it isusually not recognized, because it has becomeso big. It is indeed difficult to recognize,in the strong, lusty, thought-fellow, theoriginal thought-child which was sent intothe World. And because of that change,very often it is refused admission by its ownparent. No thought, no feeling, no action,good or evil, is ever lost. Soon or late itwill come back. It is unavoidable, becauseit is a law, which is often called the law ofRetribution. It is considered a moral law,the operation of Divine Justice, yet inreality it is nothing but a physical law,which no man living in a physical body canever avoid, because it is a law of Nature.When human beings will know that to be amw with which no avoidance, pleading, orcompromise is possible, they will, out of self-

258

protection, cease to send unkind thoughts orfeelings, or perform evil actions, becausethey will know that soon or late they willhave to encounter the consequences. Andthe shock will be great, because concentratedthoughts always come back vastly increased.This mental law explains that statement ofJesus which created so much discussionamong all Christian theologians, and whichwas never settled by them in a satisfactoryway. Jesus said, "WITH WHAT MEASUREYE METE, IT SHALL.BE MEASURED TOYOIJ AGAIN," and He added also, "THATTHE MEASURE WOULD BE FULL, PRESSEDDOWN AND RUNNING OVER."Almost everyone has bad the experiencein life that kind thoughts or good actionswhich they continually bestowed upon someindividuals, were not at all appreciated,and seemed to be entirely wasted. Ingrati-tude was often the only return for suchkindness, which naturally caused greatdisappointment. On the other hand, for noapparent reason, complete strangers withwhom one was later thrown in contact beganto show unexpected kindness in thought anddeed. Naturally, an unconscious comparisonbetween the two cases arises in one's mind,and the question presents itself of whythose to whom good was done did notrespond, while others to whom nothing wasgiven became channels for good to beexpressed. And because that good camefrom strangers, it made one feel almost

259

uncomfortable, so that one was even temptedto refuse it. That must never be done, how-ever, because it means to refuse admissionto one's own thoughts or actions. Thosekind thoughts or deeds which were consideredlost are thus coming back to their author,and vastly increased, for the reasonsexplained above. Good thoughts are to bereceived with joy, and evil thoughts withlove, so as to transmute their nature fromnegative to positive. No matter how muchone may try to prevent those thoughts fromcoming back, they will continually returnuntil they gain admission.The concentrated thought, when filledwith Life Energy, possesses a tremendouscreative power. As the law of Attraction iscontinually operating through it, it graduallyattracts all the elements necessary to bringthat thought into actual manifestation onthis material plane. Thus all human desirescan be scientifically realized in one's life, ifthey are not contrary to the Universal Laws.The following method can be used to securethe desired success. After the mental con-tact with the Universal Life Energy is made,concentrate the thought, as explained pre-viously, on the desired object. Make it soreal, mentally, that it will seem to be anactual fact. Repeat this as often as possible,and at the same time use constant effort tocome into material contact with the desiredobject, which will then finally grow intoone's life. Life Energy, with its unlimited

260

power of Attraction, will attract to themental concept of the concentrated thoughtthe material elements for its expression.Never doubt, or fear that it will not be so,because fear or doubt will prevent therealization of one's desires. Remember that,in conjunction with the mental law, iscontinually operating the Law of Attraction.All one needs to do is to perform one's partproperly, and leave the rest to the law ofCause and Effect, the continual operationof which will bring about the desired results.Thus worry, that great enemy of all unfold-ment, will also be destroyed. As an artist,before painting a picture, must have italready created in his mind, so it is in life.First must be created, by the concentratedthought, the mental image of the thing onedesires. Repeatedly dwelling on it increasesits powers in every direction, and condensesthem until, like invisible vapors which,when condensed, appear suddenly as avisible drop, they burst forth in a materialrealization. The more Life Force there isused in the concentrated thought, thestronger are those powers manifested in it.By continual contact, through the mentalmethod, with Universal Life Energy, thatpower is developed to an ever increasingdegree. Thus every human being can byand by have all his desires realized, if he willpersevere long enough in constructive workin that direction on the two planes, the men-tal and the physical. With Mental Vibra-

261

tions, as with everything else, perseveranceis one of the important factors of Success.Therefore the cardinal point to be remem-bered is that in order to obtain Success,mental activities must be combined withactual driving and working in the samedirection also on the material plane.The reason why our creative thoughtsand desires are not immediately realized isbecause of our present material state ofconsciousness, which must translate every-thing into its own terms to make it tangible.In other words, physical effort and work arenecessary to materialize it in one's life.When our state of consciousness will haverisen to the plane of Mind, every thought willbe a creation by itself, and just as real andtangible to those living on that plane as arematerial things to us now. Then the wholeWorld will be a mental World, in whichHumanity will live unrestricted by thephysical, material limitations which nowbind them. Yet even that is not a perfectcondition, as the human mind is still full ofits own limitations. It is Lucifer, who is stillan exile from Heaven, and who thereforecannot grasp such concepts as Infinity andEternity. Only when Love, the Christ ele-ment in each human being, will have purifiedthe human mind, and restored Lucifer, thefallen one, to his original status of eternalperfection, will Mind break all its limitations,and be reunited with the Infinite andEternal. That last step will be called the

262

Spiritual State of Consciousness. And whenHumanity will have reached it, they willrealize that the realm of Spirit is all thereIs.The power of concentrated thought has aspecial application in healing all kinds oftroubles, physical, mental, and emotional.These, in the form commonly called diseases,are like parasites preying on their victim.They clog the normal functions of the body,which becomes sluggish or temporarilyabortive, although their fundamental naturesremain the same. Such mental parasitesappear to be negative through and through,yet that is not the case. Even mental germsof diseases, or evil thoughts, could have noactual power if it were not for the LifeEnergy which animates them. In thoseinstances perfect Life Energy is clothed withnegative thought films, which hold itimprisoned. It is like a soap bubble which,although it may appear to be a homogeneousmass throughout, is nothing but a tiny filmseparating the air within from the. air with-out. A slight touch breaks the film, andthe soap bubble is no more. So it is with dis-eases and all other kinds of negative thoughtsgrowing in the field of the Sub-consciousness.They are but bubbles of evil, and aredestroyed by the strong contact of a con-centrated, positive thought. The bubbleof evil then bursts, and Life Energy, pureand perfect, is liberated from it, to becomeone with the concentrated thought, thus

263

increasing that thought's healing power.The negative is destroyed in that way, bythe proper use of mental laws.Whenever a case of a negative conditionis handled, the first thing to do is to makethe mental contact with Universal LifeEnergy, and let the magnetic current flowinto the body of the patient until the pointof saturation is reached. The next step is todeny silently the fear of the trouble which isbesetting the patient. Negation of anythingon the mental plane means death to the thingwhich is denied. As the fear of any kind oftrouble is the power by which that troublehas hold of an individual, it is thereforeessential first to deny and thus destroy thatfear. That fear once destroyed, the elimina-tion of the trouble itself is a comparativelyeasy task. There is another reason why it ispreferable to deny the fear of a trouble ratherthan to deny the trouble itself. A silentdenial of the negative condition itself isusually not very favorably accepted by thepatient's mind. To deny a violent head-ache, which appears so real to the one whohas it, will result only in stirring up a silentmental protest in the mind of the patient."My head is splitting, and you try to assureme that there is no headache," is the retortof the mind to such a denial. On the otherhand, the denial of the fear of the samenegative condition will produce oppositeresults in the mind of the patient, which willsay, "It is true that my head aches terribly,

264

but I do not fear it; I am brave enough toface it, and to try to overcome it." Such amethod of procedure always works better,because of the peculiar psychology of themind of the individual. Everyone likes to becalled brave, and even the human mind is notan exception to that general rule. Mentaldenials should never be made in an aggressivetone, for two reasons. First, it wouldantagonize the patient's mental self; second-ly, it would show that the operator himself ismaking a reality out of that trouble whichhe tries to remove. Those who are con-scious of their own power are always calmand dignified, and never aggressive, becauseaggressiveness is due to latent fear, and istherefore weakness, not strength. Neithermust the denial be too often repeated, asotherwise it may produce just the oppositeresult from the desired one. By too manyrepetitions of the denial, unfortunately thetrouble itself, which one is supposed todestroy, is being emphasized, because thepatient's mind is continually dwelling on it,with the result that the trouble one wishes toovercome has been greatly increased in thepatient's mind. A strong, calm, dignified,denial produces the best results. The onlyconsideration Jesus ever showed to evil wasto say, "Get thee behind me, Satan!" Heknew the law, and scientifically applied itall the time, because He was the greatestscientist the world has ever known. Afterthe denial of the fear of the trouble, the

265

operator must realize within his own mindthe opposite Positive Reality. There, allthe science and knowledge derived from theprevious lessons must be properly utilized.The basic, eternal Truth to be realized isthat man is the eternal and perfect manifesta-tion of the Absolute, and is in direct andconstant relation with It. That realizationof Eternal Harmony is often called the"DECLARATION OF TRUTH" It is indeeda declaration of Truth, the stating ofthose Eternal Verities. It is just theopposite of what are commonly called sug-gestions. There the operator, by the useof the mental laws, merely suggests to thepatient a certain thought. That thoughtmay or may not be true, yet the Self-consciousness may accept it because ofignorance, and the Sub-consciousness developit, being without the power of discrimina-tion between good and evil. Such a methodis reprehensible, because it is not based on aUniversal Law, but on personal will power.The statements of the Positive Reality arelike harmonious notes, which are caught bythe mental strings of the patient in respon-sive vibrations to the original sound, becauseeach individual possesses within himselfthose latent strings of perfection, WHICHARE HIS OWN BY BIRTHRIGHT, being apart of his eternal nature. It is the awaken-ing of an individual to his own eternal,perfect status, and the more the individualbecomes conscious of it, the greater is the

266

victory on the side of the positive. Thethoughts of health and harmony sent bythe operator to his patient are both healingvibrations and seeds of health. The operatormust never make a reality out of thetrouble he wishes to overcome in his patient.Though performing all that mental workwithin his own mind according to the rulesstated in the beginning of this lesson, hedoes it only for the patient. The operator'sown knowledge of the unreality of allnegative must be so strong that he does notneed to deny for himself even the fear of itsexistence. All the operator needs to do is tochange the patient's way of thinking, bydestroying those negative bubbles of evilin all its manifold aspects. Once the fieldof the Sub-consciousness of the patient isweeded of all mental tares, the wheat-thatis, the normal, positive, thoughts-willgrow and manifest itself in the activities ofthe person. Then the patient is healed.In severe chronic cases, after severalsuccessful mental treatments, the individualoften has a sudden relapse. Negative phys-ical and mental developments may become sopronounced that the patient feels he cannotstand it any longer. He feels as if all thepowers of evil were loosed upon him,depriving him even of the hope of a possiblerecovery. It is a condition so painful thatmany cannot bear it, and request theoperator to stop the treatment, as they seemto be growing worse all the time. Yet it is a

267

good sign, after all. It is called "MENTALCHEMICALIZATION," or the uprooting ofthe negative thoughts from the Sub-con-sciousness of the individual. When a plantof the negative feels its last hour has come,it clings with all its power, through its roots,to the soil of the Sub-consciousness. Natu-rally then, the process of eradication fromthe Sub-consciousness is, like every extrac-tion, a very painful operation, the more sobecause it is mental instead of physical.In such a case the operator must explain tothe patient the causes of that reaction? andshow him thc advantage of carrying thatoperation to the very end. In some casesthe negative in the patient seems to be sostrong that it is felt, even by the operatorhimself, as a great pressure which he isunable to lift. In such a case the mentaltreatment must be stopped for a while andthe whole work left exclusively to theMagnetic Force. After a little while theLife Energy of the Universe, flowing throughthe operator to the patient, will, with itswonderful basic qualities of harmony, restoreharmony within the operator, who will thenbe able to resume the mental work.As with the magnetic treatments, so alsowith the mental ones. It is impossible to tellhow long a patient should be treated. Eachcase must be handled individually, and asthere are no two cases alike, it is left to eachindividual's intuitive powers to know whento stop. A fairly good indication that the

268

treatment is successfully completed is acertain sense of relief and harmony whichthen pervades the operator. Mental treat-ments may last from five minutes to severalhours, in some exceptionally acute cases.Whenever possible they ought to be com-bined with magnetic treatments, because inthat way the negative conditions are simul-taneously attacked and destroyed in boththe body and the mind of the patient, thusbringing better and quicker results.No mental treatment of any kind shouldbe given to people without their knowledgeand their special consent. The followingexceptions may be considered: First, intreating insane people, whose minds arenot capable of determining whether they wishto be treated or not. Second, in cases wherepeople, through accident or for any otherreason, were rendered unconscious. Third,intoxicated persons whose powers of dis-crimination are temporarily in abeyance.When handling such cases, the operatormust be very careful to protect himself frommental transmission of the physical conditionof the patient, as otherwise the patient willbe disintoxicated at the expense of theoperator, who will in his turn becomeintoxicated. The fourth instance of mentaltreatment without the consent of the individ-ual is in the case of small children, who arenot yet sufficiently developed in their con-scious status to make their own choice. Insuch cases the consent of the parents,

269

especially of the mother, is absolutelynecessary. Without that consent no success-ful treatment could be given to a child,because the mother thought acts upon achild as a protecting cloak. Therefore notonly the consent of the mother is required,but she must be included in the treatmentin order to reach her child properly. As a general rule, it is advisable always toprotect oneself mentally, when treating,from the possible transfer of the negativecondition of the patient to the operator.Also when in a crowd, or among peoplewhose thoughts are not harmonious, thatself protection is necessary. It is achievedby mentally denying the possibility of trans-fer of such condition from one individual toanother. It is like surrounding one's selfwith a mental wall which, if properly built,is strong enough to repel any such negativeintrusions. Yet when building that mentalwall of self protection, one must be verycareful not to entertain any fear or doubtof its efficacy. One must remember thatONE IS A LAW TO ONE'S SELF ON THEPLANE OF MIND, and doubts and fearsare cracks in that mental wall of self pro-tection, through which that from which it isdesired to be protected can penetrate.Though the wall of mental protection is agood bulwark against the ordinary mentalintruder, it is not sufficient when dealingwith so-called mental malpractices-that is,the use of mental forces by some individual

270

for evil ends. There the only complete selfprotection is vibrations of Love. Thesebeing all powerful, perfect in every way,pervading the three planes, the physical,the mental, and the Spiritual, they formaround one a sphere of Love which, like adiamond armor, repels and destroys everynegative vibration launched against it.That important point must always beremembered, THAT LOVE IS THE ONLYSAFE PROTECTION WE HAVE.Whenever Mental Vibrations are usedon one’s own self, be it for healing,mental self-development, or any otherpurpose, the same process is employed asdescribed in the beginning of this lesson,with the sole difference that the concen-trated thought must be, so to say, inhaledtogether with the air when the diaphragm islifted and the solar plexus expanded. Thusthe concentrated thought will be thrown bythe Self-consciousness of the operator directlyinto his own Sub-consciousness, where theprocess of multiplication and developmentis the same as when that concentratedthought is thrown into the Sub-consciousnessof another individual. Needless to say, theordinary thought necessary to establish aconnection between two parties is not to beused here. It is exactly the process usedwhen one is trying to learn something byheart. To memorize properly means toplant one's own thought seeds in theground of one's own Sub-consciousness,

271

where they will in due time yield a harvest.To remember is nothing but the ability tocontact at will one's own Sub-consciousness,where all impressions are stored. Whentreating oneself mentally, it is alwaysadvisable to start with the magnetic treat-ment, because of the extraordinary harmoniz-ing effect of the Magnetic Vibrations.When treating patients at a distance, theordinary Mental Vibrations do not imply bythemselves a magnetic treatment. In orderto combine the two, the following method isto be used. Concentrate the mind on thepatient in such a way as to think of him aspresent. Make the mental image of thepatient so real and tangible that he appearsto be actually present, in the physical body.The mental image of the patient thus createdwill be the reflection of his physical self,and each mental cell of that reflection of hisbody will be connected by invisible MentalVibrations with the corresponding cell ofthe physical body of the patient. As thereare about fifty billion cells in the humanbody, each of which vibrates independentlyof the others, the mental image of thepatient will therefore have at least fiftybillion mental lines through which will flowthe magnetic current directed to that mentalimage by the operator. In order to increasethe flow of the magnetic current to themental image created by the operator, it isadvisable not only to direct one's hands, asindicated in the magnetic treatment, toward

272

the mental image, but also to use (especiallyfor beginners) either a chair or some otherconvenient material object, which must beimagined to be the body of the patient, andon which the hands of the operator may rest.The magnetic current sent into' that materialobject will, because of the mental image ofthe patient intimately connected with theobject, be transmitted from it to the patientin the manner previously stated. Duringsuch absent treatments, another feature canbe taken advantage of, which it is not advis-able to employ in present treatments.Audible treatment can be applied. Thesound vibrations of the spoken words willalso strike the mental image of the patient,himself from there will be conveyed, togetherwith the magnetic current, to the patienthimself, thus increasing the power of theMagnetic Vibrations. When properly exe-cuted, such combined absent treatmentssecure most powerful results. In fact, theyare much stronger than the ordinary treat-ments, with the patient actually present,because the patient's negative conditionproduces no impression on the operator, andtherefore has no effect on him, on account ofthe distance which separates the two.Usually the patient, on the other end of themental line, feels the presence of theoperator, as vividly, as tangibly and closely,as if he were actually there, in his physicalbody. In some instances the patient mayeven see the operator and talk with him,

273

and be convinced that the operator reallycame to him, although the operator may be,at that time, a thousand miles away. Thatpeculiar mental and magnetic phenomenon,based on the law of Vibration, explains howsometimes the same individual is seen bypeople at the same time in several differentplaces. For some reason, those people werethinking very strongly about the one whoappeared to them in what is called his"astral body." Through one of his raysthey perceived the whole individual, asthrough a ray of the sun we can see the sunitself. And as each individual radiatesinnumerable rays, many people can there-fore simultaneously perceive that individualacross Space in various places. All that isnecessary is that they shall be ''en rapport"with him--in other words, they should bemagnetically and mentally attuned.There is another form of mental forcewhich is much used nowadays, and which iscalled hypnotism and suggestion. Sugges-tion includes also auto-suggestion. Thosemethods are all fundamentally immoral,and therefore reprehensible. They violateone of the basic rights and privileges of everyhuman being, the right of self-de termination.They are based exclusively on Will Power,and their method consists in using that WillPower in connection with thoughts in orderto subjugate the other individual's willpower. If abused, they utterly destroy thecharacter of the subject, and even when used

274

with moderation, they still always neutralizehis individuality. Even auto-suggestionworks destructively, in the respect thatby continual repetition of the same thought,the mind of the individual becomes numbed,mentally frozen, almost lifeless, acting likean automaton. This shows how unscientificsuch methods are since they can producesuch negative results. Hypnotism, sugges-tion and auto-suggestion, instead of buildingup the character destroy it, and make theirvictims helpless puppets in the hands of theoutrager. Many crimes and evil actionshave been performed by different peopleand were attributed solely to them, when inreality they were nothing but channelsthrough which was operating the hiddenmental power of some other individual.Under no consideration should anyone everuse that power, even for healing purposes,nor should one ever let oneself be hypno-tized, even if only for the sake of an experi-ment. In every instance, a mental and moralloss will be the result of it, and even theoperator himself cannot escape the penaltyfor violating such fundamental laws. Soonor late, as a result of the reaction of his owndestructive thoughts and activities, inaccordance with the operation of the mentallaws, he himself will lose all will power,will have his mental and moral forces almostentirely obliterated, and will die a physical,mental and moral wreck. No one shouldever expect to be able to escape such penalty,

275

because there is no compromise with thelaws of Nature.On the other hand, the scientific mentaltreatment, as was stated previously, consistsin affirming Eternal Verities, without anydesire to force them upon one. The mentallaws will take care that a result shall beobtained. The personal responsibility ofthe operator is thrown entirely upon thelaws themselves, and the laws take goodcare that everything shall be carried outproperly. That scientific method of mentaltreatment is the stimulation of the individualand his awakening to his true status. Thesuggestion method, on thc contrary, thick-ens the veil of the individual consciousness,and paralyzes its activities.Humanity of today passes through agreat crisis. The development of man'slatent forces, the power of the liberatedthought, bring about fundamental changesin human nature. The ordinary means bywhich the outside world is contacted areno longer sufficient. New ways are sought-and found. Until today human beings havebeen conscious of only five senses, channelsthrough which impressions are conveyed tothem or from them. As Humanity is nowapproaching the sixth period of its evolution,called allegorically in the Bible the sixthday of creation, a new sense, the sixth sense,is being developed. That new channelthrough which impressions are conveyed iscalled ''Intuition.'' Intuition is that some-

276

thing which so often speaks within us, andseems to tell us what to do, and what not todo. It is not the voice of our conscience,which is heard only when we have donesomething wrong. It is a "still, small voice,"called often the voice of God, of Divinity,but which after all is only our own higherSelf, called the Super-consciousness, ofwhich our Self-consciousness becomes aware.Our higher Self knows everything. It is notlimited by Time or Space, and does not needReason to aid its mental work. It knows,because it embraces simultaneously the causeand the effect, the past, present and future.Whenever we listen to that small voice ofIntuition, and follow its advice, we obtainpositive results, though sometimes thatvoice seems to speak against our own reason.After all, it is but a seeming contradiction ofour reason, due to the present limitation ofthat faculty. In order to develop Intuition,we must train ourselves to differentiatebetween the voice of our own desires, andthat of our Super-consciousness. Thereis an easy way to discriminate between thetwo. Whenever Intuition speaks to us,there is felt a peculiar sense of peace andharmony, though it may happen in a mo-ment of most disharmonious conditions.On the other hand, when our desires speakwithin us, a sensation of restlessness comesupon us. Therefore listen to the voice ofpeace and wisdom which will lead one intoHarmony, and discard the aggressive clamor

277

of desires, as no good will come out of it.The more one listens to Intuition, the moreis Intuition developed, and the surer andwiser become all our actions. Thus humanbeings, in developing within themselvesthat Divine Ray of Intuition, will manifestWisdom, will become six-pointed starsstars of wisdom, and will bring about theDawn of the New Day, the Day of Peace,of Harmony and of Power.

278

LESSON SIX1. QUES. What is one of the great problems

of today?ANS. To educate one's mind to regener-

ate itself.2. QUES. How is it done?

ANS. By raising the vibrations of Mindto those of Truth and Love.

3. QUES. How did the first mistake origi-nate?

ANS. It originated through Mind, andthrough Mind it must bedestroyed.

4. QUES. How does Mind express itselfin our present state of con-sciousness?

ANS. Through Mental Vibrations, com-bined units of which are calledthoughts.

5. QUES. What are Mental Vibrations?ANS. The first manifestation of Self-

conscious Magnetic Vibrations.6. QUES. What role does the brain play in

the thinking process?ANS. It acts as a transmitting station.

7. QUES. What is the Telepathic Appara-tus?

ANS. It is the Pituitary Body, locatedin the front part of our brain,which sends out into Space Men-tal Vibrations, in the form ofthoughts.

8. QUES. Does the Telepathic Apparatusalso receive mental messages?

279

ANS. Yes. It is both a sending andreceiving station.

9. QUES. How does the ordinary thoughtproceed?

ANS. In spheric mental waves emanat-ing from the Telepathic Appara-tus.

10. QUES. Is the ordinary thought percept-ible at a long distance?

ANS. No, because it becomes toodiluted.

11. QUES. What is thought dust?ANS. Loose particles of ordinary

thoughts, floating in Space andsurrounding the Earth like acloud.

12. QUES. How is the thought made strongand perceptible at any distance?

ANS. By concentrating it, making itONE POINTED.

13. QUES. How is this done?ANS. Through an effort of will power

the Spheric Mental Vibrationsare focused in one point.

14. QUES. How is a concentrated thoughtsent at a distance?

ANS. By using the Life Energy storedin the solar plexus to propel thatthought.

15. QUES. What will be the guiding linewhich will bring that thought toits destination?

ANS. Invisible mental lines previouslyestablished by the ordinary

280

thought between the sender andthe receiver.

16. QUES. To what gender does thoughtbelong in general?

ANS. Every thought passing throughthe Self-consciousness, which isof the male gender, assumes thatgender.

17. QUES. Flow many genders are there inMind?

ANS. Two; the. male, represented bythe Self-consciousness, and thefemale, represented by the Sub-consciousness.

18. QUES. Has every individual the twogenders in their respective minds?

ANS. Yes, without distinction of sex.19. QUES. What is the first operation of the

concentrated thought sentthrough Space?

ANS. It strikes the Telepathic Appara-tus of the receiving individual,is from there conveyed to thebrain, and the individual becomesconscious of it.

20. QUES. What is the second operation ofthe same concentrated thought?

ANS. After having contacted the Tele-pathic Apparatus, it sinks intothe Sub-consciousness of thereceiving individual.

21. QIJES. What does it do there?ANS. It grows like an ordinary seed

thrown into the soil.

281

22. QUES. What is the main quality of theSub-consciousness?

ANS. It increases and multiplies everythought seed thrown into it.

23. QUES. Does the Sub-consciousness pos-sess the power of discrimination?

ANS. No. Being below the Self-con-scious state, it does not know howto differentiate between the posi-tive and the negative, and rearsthe wrong as well as the right.

24. QUES. When does the Self-consciousnessbecome aware of the thoughtseed thrown in its own Sub-consciousness?

ANS. When the thought seed becominga thought plant, penetrates intothe Self-consciousness.

25 QUES. Why is it difficult to eradicate athought from the Sub-conscious-ness?

ANS. Because it has rooted itself there.26. QUES. What is the next operation of

the concentrated thought?ANS. It leaves the receiving individual

and proceeds again into Space.27. QUES. How does it act there?

ANS. Like a torpedo it rushes throughSpace, attracting to it looseparticles of thought dust ofcorresponding rates of vibration.

28. QUES. Why does it attract those thoughtparticles?

ANS. Because of the magnetic power

282

of attraction of the Life Energy!with which the concentratedthought is charged.

29. QUES. What is the result of thatattraction?

ANS. The concentrated thought growsbigger and stronger.

30. QUES. How far does it proceed intoSpace?

ANS. As far as the Earth's attractionpermits it.

31. QUES. What then happens to thethought?

ANS. Like a boomerang, it returns toits point of departure.

32. QUES. What laws govern the operationof the thought?

ANS. The same laws acting on themental plane which govern phys-ical bodies on the physical plane.

33. QUES. Does the concentrated thoughtreturn direct to its startingpoint?

ANS. If it was sent into Space withoutany definite destination, it returnsdirectly. If it was sent to anotherindividual, in returning it usessome individual as a transmittingstation.

34. QUES. Why is a transmitting stationneeded in the latter case?

ANS. Because of the law of Polarity.35. QUES. Why is the concentrated thought

often not recognized on its return?

283

ANS. Because it has grown so big.36. QUES. Is any thought, feeling, or action,

good or evil, ever lost?ANS. No. It always comes back to its

author, vastly increased.37. QUES. Is there any possible way to avoid

that coming back?ANS. No, because it is due to the

operation of the law, and onereaps what one has sown.

38. QUES. What does that third operationof the concentrated thought ex-plain?

ANS. That saying of Jesus, "With whatmeasure ye meet it shall bemeasured to you again-a meas-ure full, pressed down, andRUNNING OVER."

39. QUES. What is the difference betweena creative thought, and simply athought?

ANS. The creative thought is chargedto the full with Magnetic LifeEnergy. The ordinary thought?on the contrary, has only a verylimited amount of Life Energy.

40. QUES. What power does the creativethought possess?

ANS. It attracts to us all things whichwe may desire.

41. QUES. Can we have all our desires thusrealized?

ANS. Yes, if they are not contrary tothe Universal Laws.

284

42. QUES. Which is the best method ofsecuring the desired success?

ANS. Make the mental contact withUniversal Life Energy. Makethe desired object real mentally.Repeat this as often as possible,and the desired object will comeinto one's life through the powerof attraction of the creativethought.

43. QUES. Is it also necessary to use physicaleffort to bring about the desiredsuccess?

ANS. Yes, because of our present stateof consciousness, which makes itnecessary to translate everythingalso into Matter in order tomaterialize it in one's life.

44. QUES. When will thought become anactual direct creation?

ANS. When Lucifer, the fallen Mind,will be restored to his originalstatus of Eternal Perfection.

45. QUES. What will that last step becalled?

ANS. The Spiritual State of Conscious-ness, Heaven, or the Realm ofHarmony.

46. QUES. What are diseases?ANS. They are mental parasites, prey-

ing on the Sub-consciousness ofthe individual, and manifestingthemselves to him in the form ofailments.

285

47. QUES. Are those mental parasites nega-tive through and through?

ANS. No. They are but thin films ofnegative vibrations imprisoningthe positive Life Energy withinthem.

48. QUES. How can they be destroyed?ANS. By concentrated positive Mental

Vibrations, which will piercethem like an arrow.

49. QUES. What is the best way to treatdiseases mentally?

ANS. First, deny the fear of thedisease; next, mentally realizethe positive truth back of thatdenial.

50. QUES. How many times should thedenial of a fear be repeated?

ANS. One short denial, with authorityand force, is sufficient.

51. QUES. What positive statements shouldbe used in order to bring aboutthe healing?

ANS. All knowledge concerning Man'seternal and direct relation withthe Absolute, and his perfectstatus in the Realm of EternalHarmony, should be realizedin treating the patient mentally.

52. QUES. What are the effects of thepositive work of the concentratedthought?

ANS. It awakens within the patientthe conscious realization of his

286

eternal perfect status and thusheals him.

53. QUES. Is it necessary to picture mentallythe body of a patient as perfect?

ANS. No. All that is needed is therealization that the fundamentalvibrations of the body of thepatient, representing the activi-ties of his soul are basicallyharmonious.

54. QUES. Is it necessary, when treatingthe patient mentally, to treathim also magnetically at thesame time?

ANS. It is advisable, whenever possible,to combine the two treatments,for the following reasons: First,because of the extraordinaryharmonizing effect of the Mag-netic Life Force on both operatorand subject; and secondly, be-cause the negative is thusattacked from two sides-fromthe outside magnetically, andfrom the inside mentally.

55. QUES. What is the best attitude for theoperator to take during mentalhealing?

ANS. An attitude of love and com-passion.

56. QUES. What is mental chemicalization?ANS. It is the reaction of the Negative

to the mental influence of thePositive. The bubble of the

287

Negative inflates to the limitbefore bursting.

57. QUES. What is to be done in case ofmental chernicalization?

ANS. Explain to the patient the causesof it, and persevere in the treat-ment to the end.

58. QUES. How long should one treatmentally?

ANS. No definite rule can be given,the operator must sense withinhimself when to stop. As ageneral rule, from five to fifteenminutes is quite sufficient; inexceptionally acute cases treat-ments may last several hours.

59. QUES. Can one treat people mentallywithout their special consent forit?

ANS. No, except, in the followinginstances: First when treatinginsane people; secondly, whentreating people rendered un-conscious; third, intoxicated peo-ple; fourth, children.

60. QUES. How should children be treated?ANS. By including the mother also in

the treatment.61. QUES. Is it advisable to protect one-

self mentally when treating pa-tients, or when mingling withdifferent people?

ANS. Yes, in order to prevent thepenetration of undesirable

288

thought seeds into one's sub-conscious mind.

62. QUES. How is that protection estab-lished?

ANS. By building around oneself amental wall.

63. QUES. Does mental protection secureone complete safety?

ANS. No. Only Love Vibrations giveone complete protection, becausethey form around an individuala complete sphere of vibrationswhich nothing negative can piercethrough. Love is the only safeprotection we have.

64. QUES. What process is to be used inmental self healing?

ANS. The same method as is used inhealing others, except that in-stead of sending the concentratedthought to another individual, itis allowed to sink into one s ownSub-consciousness.

65. QUES. Can magnetic and mental treat-ments be combined when treatinga patient at a distance?

ANS. Yes.66. QUES. What is the method of procedure?

ANS. Create through mental concentra-tion the image of the patient.Then treat that image both mag-netically and mentally as if itwere actually the patient him-self.

289

67. QUES. Through what means will theMagnetic and Mental Forces beconveyed from the image to thepatient himself?

ANS. Through billions of mental linesconnecting the two.

68. QUES. Is it advisable to use audiblemental treatment in such cases?

ANS. Yes.69. QUES. What is the difference between

the scientific method of mentaltreatment, and hypnotism, sug-gestion, and auto-suggestion?

ANS. The first awakens the individualto his true, perfect, and eternalstatus. The second, third andfourth, paralyze the expressionof individuality by substitutingnew beliefs for old ones.

70. QUES. Are hypnotism, suggestion, andauto-suggestion dangerous?

ANS. Yes, they are one of the mostdangerous and most immoralabuses of Mental Force.

71. QUES. Should hypnotism, suggestion, orauto-suggestion be used in thera-peutics?

ANS. No, under no consideration.72. QUES. What is the penalty for the abuse

of the Mental Force?ANS. The complete loss of it.

73. QUES. What is the sixth sense?ANS. It is Intuition.

74. QUES. How does Intuition express itself?

290

ANS. Through an inner voice which iscontinually speaking to us.

75. QUES. What is the practical value ofIntuition?

ANS. It enables one to sense Truthindependently of the reasoningpowers.

76. QUES. What is the sign by which thevoice of Intuition can he dis-tinguished from other innervoices?

ANS. Whenever Intuition speaks to us,a peculiar sense of peace andharmony is felt.

77. QUES. How can Intuition he developed?ANS. By continually listening to its

voice, and co-ordinating ourreason with it.

78. QUES. What are the practical resultsobtained by developing Intuition?

ANS. Man will become six-pointedthat means, perfectly balanced.

79. QUES. What effect would that have onHumanity's Evolution?

ANS. It would bring about the dawn ofthe New Day, the Day of Peace,of Harmony, and of Power.

291

292

293

PIRITUAL Power is ob-tained only by those who hon-estly and unselfishly live a lifeof Activity, Intelligence,Truth, and Love. As it was

explained in the First Lesson, they arebound to reach Spirit, the culminate pointof the Life Pyramid, not only becausethey want to be Spiritual, but because inliving their daily life according to the Lawsof the Absolute they cannot help reachingSpirit through the operation of the veryLaws they live.First a few glimpses of that SpiritualPower will come to them. They will, duringtheir silence and in contacting the Universal

294

Life Energy, rise higher and higher untilfinally they will reach Spiritual Vibrations,which are the highest we know of in ourpresent stake of consciousness. Very oftenhigh mental vibrations are taken for Spiritualones, but whoever has experienced SpiritualVibrations can never confuse the two. Whenmental vibrations rise very high, they becomenot only very powerful but also very sooth-ing and harmonious because of their approachto the Spiritual Plane. Still they are notyet Spiritual.Mental vibrations can come very close toPerfection, but they cannot yet enter theGates of Perfection because of the peculiarcondition in which the human Mind is now.Mind, Lucifer, is still an exile from Heaven;he has not the right to return to his EternalHome until he has learned the lesson of Love,has permeated his own quality with thequality of his Eternal Twin, Love (Christ).Until our Mind is pervaded with absoluteLove, that Mind will still remain at theGates of Heaven and will not enter in. It isonly Love, the Christ element within us,which can bear us through the Gates ofHeaven into Eternal Harmony. Mind hasto give up its work there and let Inspirationand Love take us by the hand and lead usinto the Realm of Spirit.The previous six lessons were graduallypreparing the student for this last SeventhLesson. There has been a great deal ofdetail in these lessons; but when one comes

295

to the apex, to Spirit, there everything issimplicity, and because of that wonderfulsimplicity, the Seventh Lesson can beproperly received only through Intuition andInspiration.Yet, even in this instance, there is acertain way of procedure to reach SpiritualVibrations, and the theory of it is thefollowing:

WHEN THE POSITIVE THOUGHT ISESTABLISHED AND THE MAGNETIC CUR-RENT FLOWING, RISE HIGHER ANDHIGHER THROUGH INSPIRATION INTOTHE REALM OP SPIRIT. FORGET PERSON-ALITY AND KNOW THAT YOU ARE NOTH-ING BY YOURSELP AND EVERYTHINGWITH GOD, THE FATHER, THE ABSOLUTE,THE GREAT PRINCIPLE, WHICH CREATES,CONSTITUTES, GOVERNS, SUSTAINS ANDCONTAINS ALL. TAKE LONG, DEEP, EVENBREATHS, AND LET YOUR LAST CON-SCIOUS THOUGHT BE THE REALIZATIONOF YOUR ONENESS WITH SPIRIT. THEREWILL COME A MOMENT WHEN SUDDENLYAN INFLUX OF EXTRAODINARY LIGHTWILL BE FELT-- A LIVING, CONSCIOUS,LOVING LIGHT. LIGIIT WITIHN AND LIGHTWITHOUT. YOU WILL FEEL AS IF MERGEDIN AN OCEAN OF LIGHT AND AT THESAME TIME YOU WILL FEEL THAT LIGHTALSO WITHIN YOU. THAT IS, YOU WILLREALIZE YOUR COMPLETE ONENESS WITHTHAT LIGHT. THUS THE SPIRITUALVIBRATIONS ARE CONTACTED. YOUR

296

WORK IS DONE – LEAVE THE REST TOTHE GREAT LAW. WHEN YOU WILL FEELTHOSE SPIPITUAL VIBRATIONS PADINGAWAY, DO NOT TRY TO STOP THEM.SPIRIT CANNOT BE FORCED. LET THEMDISAPPEAR NATURALLY.To establish the positive thought meansto do all the mental work as far as concernsthe realization of Man's perfect status, hisdirect and constant relation with the GreatPrinciple, his Author. There all the knowl-edge obtained, especially in the FirstLesson, as well as in the other previous les-sons, must be used. In other words, withinone s mind must be fully realized Man'sEternal Perfection. Naturally, the contactwith the Universal Life Energy must bemade first, and the Magnetic Current flow-ing, during the process of establishing thepositive thought. When that is accomplishedand the realization of Man's Real Self andhis relation to the Absolute is clear in one smind, then is the time to rise higher.Personality must be entirely forgotten, aswell of the patient as of the healer. Mindhas completed its work, and it is to higherPowers, to Inspiration and Love, to carrythe work further. Through Inspirationcoming from our Super-conscious Self mustwe raise our vibrations into the highest;once started in that direction, our vibrationswill carry us higher and higher, because ofthe Law of Evolution which says: "Allvibrations tend naturally to rise upward in

297

the scale of Eternal Harmony." In realiz-ing that all Power comes from the Father,from the Absolute, the Great Principle,Which creates, constitutes, governs, sustainsand contains all, we thus identify ourselvesmore and more with that Power. Our lastconscious thought must he to know and tofeel that Oneness with the Absolute. Thenwe must let ourselves go entirely and loseconsciousness of all surroundings. Long,deep, even breaths taken at that time willhelp a great deal to increase our emotionalvibrations. And then will come a momentwhen suddenly a flood of dazzling Lightbursts upon us. Not mere physical light isIt; It is living; one feels Its pulsations. It isconscious; It seems to know everything. Onesenses how wise It is. And supremely lovingis this Light also. It is like the soft caress ofa mother-Love within, Love without. Onefeels as if merged in an ocean of Light, as ifwaves of that Light are passing through oneand beating at the shores of one's inner self.Light within, Light without. A completeOneness with that wondrous Power is real-ized, and yet one's individuality is notdissolved, not lost, in all that Power.At the same time beautiful music,harmonies of the Spiritual Spheres, arevibrating about us, and evoking echoes fromwithin. Wonderful fragrance penetrates onethrough and through. Like living waters,like nectar, the drink of gods, come thoseVibrations to one s sense of taste; and as a

298

lovely breeze, soft yet penetrating to thevery depth of one's being, It expresses Itselfthrough the sense of touch. It is Ecstasy,Infinite Bliss, Heaven brought down toEarth. Thus Spiritual Vibrations are con-tacted; man becomes consciously One withGod. There are no adequate words to expressthis condition. Once experienced, no one canever forget it. Christians call it Ecstasy, theTouch of Grace. The Hindus call it Samadhi,Nirvana; the Mohammedans, Paradisic Bliss.the Seventh Heaven. Whenever Spirit iscontacted in that highest aspect, healing isinstantaneous. Not only healing of physicalills, but also of mental and moral troubles.The Ray of Spirit changes entirely the natureof the individual; like fire, It cleanses andpurifies it, and from a sinner It does make asaint. When Mary Magdalene, a woman ofthe lowest moral standard, bathed with hertears the feet of the beloved Master, she roseinto the highest, she contacted SpiritualVibrations, and from a harlot she became asainted woman. When Saul of Tarsus,persecutor of Christians, on his way toDamascus, was struck with the Divine Light,Spiritual Vibrations contacted him and hewas first blinded, but when he recoveredagain his sight, from a persecutor of Christand his followers, he became St. Paul, one ofHis greatest Apostles. Whenever an in-dividual is touched by Spiritual Vibrations,by Grace, his whole nature is changedand he becomes another being. No man

299

can tell who will respond to that highest call.Many surprises may await those who tryto bring about this contact with the Divine.Some people, seemingly material through andthrough, suddenly are able, through Loveand Inspiration, to rise into the highest; andsome, called spiritual characters, believingthemselves to be such, when Spirit comes tothem, cannot rise to meet the Holiest, andthus remain shut out from the Greatest thereis. It requires the cooperation of the patientwith the healer, a sincere cooperation, inorder to bring about the highest results. Ifthe patient is not ready, no matter how hardthe healer may try, he will not be able to lifthim into the Realm of Spirit. Therefore, ifone would have that wonderful experience ofbecoming consciously One with the Absolute,it were better to enter alone into the secretchamber of one's inner consciousness, andthere try through Inspiration and Love toreach Spirit. When the Spiritual contact ismade, the hands of the healer, if they rest onthe shoulders or on any other part of thebody of the patient, will be raised uncon-sciously and held over the patient in a posi-tion of blessing. The moment we becomeOne with the Absolute, we are so completelyidentified with His Nature that we uncon-sciously do what He does throughoutEternity. "He blesses the Universe whichHe has begotten." Therefore, we bless theWorld also and the patient who is thereunder our care; and through our hands, from

300

all our being, are flowing no longer ordinaryMagnetic or Mental Vibrations, but theVibrations of the Spirit Itself, Whose touchis sacred above all. A condition of such Blisscould not last for any length of time, becauseunder the Divine Ray a human body wouldbe dissolved. Therefore, Spiritual Vibrationsstay with us only as long as we can bearthem, and gradually, like some lovely strainof music, they begin to fade away. No matterhow much we would like them to remain, weare not permitted to ask them to tarry longer.Spirit knows Its own and cannot be governed;we must let these Spiritual Vibrations fadeaway naturally and be thankful to our Fatherthat we were able to contact Him in Hishighest Aspect. Our work is done; we mustleave the rest to the Great Law.According to Scientific investigations,Spiritual Vibrations are sent out and receivedthrough a certain physical organ located inthe upper part of the brain behind thePituitary Body and called the Pineal Gland.The continual, conscious rising within ourown selves of our highest emotional vibra-tions, stimulates more and more the PinealGland, that organ of our Super-conscious-ness, which is also the most sensitive organin our body. The Pineal Gland then beginsto function with increasing power, and inthat way acts as a physical channel throughwhich are contacted Spiritual Vibrations, thehighest we know of in our present state ofconsciousness.

301

The Super-consciousness is in human be-ings the direct Spiritual link between themand the Absolute. Through it human con-sciousness is connected with Cosmic Intelli-gence. It is the guardian angel referred toin different religions, who day and nightbeholds the Face of God.Not always is one successful in contactingSpiritual Vibrations. Favorable conditionsmust combine into a harmonious cooperationin order to bring about that contact. Never-theless, we must always try to reach thehighest, to rise into the Spiritual Realm, andwe must not feel discouraged if we do notsucceed each time. Each trial, each effort inthat direction will bring us closer and closerto the Source of Spiritual Power. Some daywe will reach that Spiritual Power, will be-come One with It; and in that day, all Powerwill be ours. It is the Baptism by the HolyGhost when that Power illumines one. Butbefore reaching that very Highest, beforebeing baptized by the Spirit, one must gofirst through the Baptism by Fire, the puri-fication necessary for a higher initiation.About two thousand years ago a VoiceCrying in the Wilderness, John, the one whowalked before Christ, to prepare the way,baptized humanity with water. That meanshe cleansed, regenerated their bodies, theirphysical, animal natures, to receive properlythe teachings of the Savior of the World.Today, twenty centuries later, comes toHumanity the Baptism by Fire; that is, the

302

purification of the human mind throughknowledge aflame with Love. It is a stephigher, it is a preparation for the coming ofOne, Who, when lie comes to this Earthagain, will baptize with the Baptism ofSpirit, or the Holy Ghost, those who arealready purified by Fire, by the radiantFlame of Love. No man will come unto theSpirit until his body is made clean by water,and his mind pure by fire. That is, no manwill be liberated from the bonds of ignoranceand fear, and rise into Eternal Freedom, whohas not regenerated his body through LifeEnergy (Magnetic Vibrations), and purifiedhis mind by Truth and Love.

THE TWO ROADSGreat signs are given to Humanity todayas in the days of old, yet with eyes open theydo not see, and with cars open they do nothear, because their hearts are closed throughthe pride of their minds.Human beings have two Roads to walkupon. One is the Human Road; the nature ofthe other road is Divine; and happiness is thegoal of both.Those who decide to walk the HumanRoad must always look about for help andassistance from their fellow beings. They bowbefore the powers of this world, they flatterthem, they compromise with their own heartsbecause they think the end can justify the

303

means. And for a time success is theirs. Yetthe more they scheme, the more difficult itbecomes to keep in harmony with all; still,they advance because support was promisedthem by word of mouth by many mighty ofthis world. At last they reach their goal.With hands extended, ready to grasp it, theysay it is their own, when suddenly, beneaththeir feet the very ground is shattered topieces and they fall, their goal not achieved!Why such disaster, such terrible deception?Why all this loss of energy, of time, of hope?Because their ignorance made them relyupon that which is the most unreliable thingon earth . . . . upon human beings.And there are those who walk the DivineRoad. No human help do they expect. Atfirst their steps are handicapped. They haveto fight ill-will, and apathy, and ignorance,and fear. From time to time some promisesby humans are made to them to help them intheir work. With gratitude they thank, yetdo not build on these, as they rely alone onLaws and Divine Help. They know thathuman beings, those even of the best, arehuman still, hence limited in every way, andtherefore do they trust themselves to Godalone. They know that limitations can neverprevent All Power from expressing Itselfthrough endless means. They know that ifone human promise wanes, that if one humanfriend will fail, there are ten more throughwhich the Great Law manifests Itself. Andif those ten should also fail, there are many

304

others, countless channels, through which allgood will come to them who walk the DivineRoad. And by and by, slowly, step afterstep they climb, overcoming obstacles alongthe way, until easier and broader turns thepath on which they move onward. Strengthand joy increase continually; there the goal isin sight, within their reach. They raise theirhands and take their own. No man can stealaway that prize of theirs, because it is theirown by right.Those are the two Roads which lie beforeeach man on Earth; let every human beingpause and ponder well which path is best totake.One last question, a great question, liesstill open for those who wish to know. Whyis there Evil in this World? If God is God,why does He tolerate all sin, sorrow, suffer-ing, to be spread broadcast upon this Earth?Why should Man, if son of God, the same inessence as the Spirit, the Great All, whyshould he need to toil, to strive, to suffer?Old as the World is this question. Mostdifficult to answer. No direct message couldreach us through all these labyrinths of thehuman mind; therefore from above, throughInspiration, veiled in a legend, must come tosuffering Humanity the answer. That an-swer-closing chapter of this book of Scienceof Eternal Being-is called "The Dream."

305

THE DREAMNight! The fragrance of a warm summernight suffuses all Nature. The firmamentstudded with stars glowing like diamonds, anet of glistening loveliness, through whichthe dark beauty of night is fading.Soft, living Light invades the clear atmos-phere like golden vapor. It increasessteadily, penetrating and covering every-thing. Bathed in its radiance, there appearglittering diamond peaks, mountains of topazand amethyst, massive rocks of emerald,gigantic monoliths of sapphire, as steps lead-ing to higher regions. The Light grows instrength, investing all things with color andwarmth. These are no rays of a sun risingfrom behind the hills, but a glowing radianceemanating from everywhere, embracingeverything, and increasing like some strainof music: and indeed, there is music in theair. Gentle melodies are trembling, softharmonies are vibrating, and mysteriousechoes answer them.Set amidst these precious mountains,surrounded by a grove of gigantic trees solofty that they appear to be talking with theclouds, stands a Palace, large as a city and ofwondrous beauty. The walls of it are streamsof Light rising from the ground and playingin all the colors of the rainbow. Its flatroofs, towers and domes are golden cloudsupon which the glow of the spreading Lightis shedding its morning splendor.And still the Light grows in strength.

306

Through the golden roof of the Palace risesan innumerable procession of Beings, eachone seeming more wonderful than the other.Of almost similar height and size are they,but how different each one! Some are likefiery lava streaming from the crater of avolcano; some are like moonrays made livingbeings; some like roaring waterfalls withrainbows playing about their heads; somelike precious stones become alive. Their won-derful bodies appear in all their unhidden glo-ry: no covering conceals their Eternal beauty.And eyes, such as when the Spirit Itself lookson the World It has created, full of suprememajesty and power, full of Infinite Love, areshining from under their divine brows!Two of these Beings rise with the restfrom the depths of the Palace, and like twinstars stand tenderly embraced on the top ofthe highest tower. More radiant, morewonderful than the others are they. Like abrilliant star is the countenance of one. Hisbody, taller and stronger than that of hisMate, is like a phosphorescent opal. Streamsof living Light are flowing through his bodyand making it shine in iridescent hues. Hiseyes are lightning; a purple cloud his hair;and when he speaks and when he moves, faraway thunder Is heard.............Goldenand shining is his Companion, his bodywoven of sun-rays, his hair a glowing flame,his eyes reflecting the glory of Heaven itself;and when he speaks and when he moves, softharmonies fill the air.

307

With gestures of adoration they raise theirarms in triumphant song---greeting to theSpirit, thanks to the Great Giver. Theirbrothers follow them in the song; all Naturejoins in this hymn of gratitude. Birds andanimals, trees and flowers, rocks and clouds,waters and the ground itself, sing the eternalpraise of all beings to The One SupremeBeing, their Divine Father. Stronger andmore wondrous grows the great song, flood-ing the Universe with praise and love; it risesto a thunder of triumph, and dies away insilence.Silence! A limpid breeze moves the air,and each one feels within himself the words,"Live and Love." The Great Spirit, TheFather, is communing with His children.Infinite bliss fills every being, and pervadesthe Universe. The Day of Heaven hasbegun.But the triumphant band passes out ofsight; the roofs are deserted; and the two,the Heavenly Twins, sink back into thePalace. And there they stand within thegreat tower in the very midst of it. High,circular walls surround them, but there areno openings in those walls. Deep and mys-terious is the material out of which they arebuilt; precious also is it, for its name isSilence. And upon those mighty walls ofSilence, towering high up into the free air,are set lofty pillars. Precious also is the ma-terial from which they are made, shining inall the colors of the rainbow; their name is

308

Hope. And through these pillars of Hopestretching their slender shafts into the high-est air, are sailing golden clouds. Silent theymove through the tower of Silence; but thebirds with the rustling of their wings, do notdare to fly through because of the sacredSilence.A Upon these pillars of Hope rests a gloriousdome, effulgent as a sun, and Joy is thematerial out of which the dome is made. Andthe floor upon which they stand is a trans-parent crystal, a gigantic lens, and throughthat lens the whole Universe appears stretchedout at their feet. Worlds without number,all stars, sun-systems, chains of planets, allbeings, every thing, the greatest and thesmallest, can be seen through that crystal.Understanding is the material out of whichthat floor is made. With their feet firmlyestablished on Understanding, with Silencesurrounding them, with Hope towering overthem and with Joy crowning them, stand thetwo, keeping watch over the World.And the one whose voice is like thunderspeaks to his Mate.Oh! Thou loved One! Thou, radiant Joyof the World! Once more we stand ready tofulfil our charge, to carry out our duties inthe eternal scheme-Thou the Love of theWorld, I the Mind of it. All knowledge, allpower are ours. Why then must we everymorning adore, greet as our Master, OneWhom none has ever seen? Thou art fromEternity, and I am from Eternity, and so are

309

all our brothers. Yet who has ever seen theOne Who claims to be our Father and Who iscalled God? True it is that every morning aVoice speaks within us-but there is none cantell whether it comes not from our veryselves. Why should we adore any longerOne Who remains a mystery to us? Enoughthat we should be slaves to an unknownmaster. Let us free ourselves from the bondsby which we are now bound. All powers, allforces are ours; therefore let us rule theWorld-we two, the greatest powers of thisWorld."The answer came soft-winged, tender asLove itself."Ah! Brother, Why these words ofpride, of revolt? Thou knowest-for thyheart tells thee in spite of all-that there is aGod, that we have an invisible Father,Who is also our loving Mother, and Whoenfolds us, His children, in His Divineembrace. He thinks continually of us.He plans ceaselessly for our joy. For us Hepours out into manifestation the endlessbeauties, the transplendent wonders, fromthe unmanifest regions of His Heart. AndHe asks nothing from us but our love. Is itso difficult to love Him Who so loves us?Dismiss these thoughts of rebellion, forgetthese proud words. Sorrow alone can comefrom them, my Brother."Like sudden thunder, like the burstingof crashing floods, came the roaring, shatter-ing outcry.

310

"What is this Hidden Power that cancompel Mind? Mind, the glittering lumin-ary of all the Worlds, is regent in theUniverse. No servant's place shall I be satis-fied to take. But if thou, oh my gentle Brother!wilt not rule with me, and share my power,then alone shall I command the World."And with these words, swift as a streakof lightning, he rises from the ground ofUnderstanding, through Silence, throughHope, through radiant Joy, into the open.Higher and still more high, past the preciousmountains, he climbs the lambent air, leav-ing behind a blazing train of phosphorus,until his feet touch the summit of the mostaspiring peak, the pinnacle of glitteringdiamond. Poised on the shining spire, hiscry goes out to all the World."Spirits of Light! Sons of Eternity! Theday of freedom, of liberation, has cometo us! Free are ye born, free shall ye live!No more adoration, no more praying to aMaster, to a God Whom none has ever seen.From now, ye shall be your own masters.Come all, come all to me, and ye shall befree!"And from the hidden parts of all theWorld, myriads of Spirits, Sons of Light, aregathering together. They surround thediamond peak where stands the one whoseeyes are lightning, whose countenance islike a blazing star. With words of adorationthey shout:"Hail to thee, Lucifer! Son of the Morn-

311

ing! Hail to thee, Liberator! Our Leader,our Master, our God!"And he who is proclaimed the master ofthe how, called the ruler of the World,looks down upon those prostrate at his feet."I am your master, I am your god!Follow me, for I alone can give you freedom;new beauties shall ye discover through me,new powers and forces shall ye wield. Yeshall become more piercingly brilliant thanever ye have been, like flaming diamonds,more scintillating than the blazing suns.But in the sacred grove, hidden amid thegiant trees, with sad eyes and a heavy heart,stands one whose name is Love, words ofprayer falling from his lips."Father, Beloved One! Beating Heartof all the Universe! Forgive them, for theyknow not what they do. Him they callGod, Lucifer they acknowledge as supreme.Yet he is nothing but Thy child, and all hispowers and beauties he has from Thee.True it is he appears supreme, for his feettouch the ground, his head reaches Heaven,and his glory seems to fill all Space, yet theyare as deceived as he is himself. It is Thyglory which is still shining through him, andThy power is taken for his own. Father,forgive them, for they know not what theydo. Forgive my Brother, Lucifer, for he isstill the dearest to my heart: he also knowsnot what he does!"From his piercing height, Lucifer heardthe faithful, praying voice-and smiled on

312

him in contempt. But suddenly anotherVoice, heavy with destiny, gathering in itsmight the Unmeasured Energy of all theWorlds:"Lucifer! In Heaven all desires areachievement. Thou wouldst be free-thoushalt be free. Go thou, and all those whoworship thee, to that further plane to whichye all belong. These Regions of EternalLight can bear thee no longer. Your bodiescast shadows in the pure skies. Prom theSpheres of Light to the outer, utmost void-go!'Thus the Voice from the Vaulted Silence:and on the moment, a sudden burden as ofgreat heaviness falls on Lucifer and hisfollowers. They are no longer able to offerresistance against its weight, and with ablast of thunder and terror, they fall fromthe Realms of Light into the somber void.As they fall darkness grows denser aboutthem, until no spark of Light, no hope isleft to them. Par in the utter gloom, stillfalling, they perceive a fiery region whichdraws them swiftly to it with irresistibleforce. And they are cast into an ocean offire, of smoke, of molten metal, of boilingstone.He who was the first to fall, is also thefirst to rise again. And he sees his brothers,his followers, once Spirits of Light, darkened,disgraced, extinguished, thrown into thatabode of fire and suffering. And he calls tothem:

313

"Rise, my brothers! Rise, ye who arestill the Sons of Light! True it is that fromthe highest Spheres of Bliss, we have beencast into this desolation. Yet all knowledgeis still mine, and thus all power, and I shallmake for you from this hell a new Heaven,and this new Heaven shall be called Earth."As he speaks the ages pass, the flamingfields contract, the incandescence blazeswith a fainter heat, the fumes and vaporsgradually disperse, and a lustrous, glowingplanet, cradled in fire and beauty, is born.The lovely Earth appears---green hills andgentle slopes and flowery meadows, singingbrooks, clear rivers and the blue sea,mountains and chasms and waterfalls.And through enchanted forests birds of ahundred colors are flying, and in the fieldsanimals are roaming. And Lucifer is pleasedwith his creation and says:"And now, my Brothers! Ye shall be theinhabitants of this new Heaven and ye shallbe called human beings."And wonderful beings, lofty of stature,strong and comely, appear on the Earth:they propagate and multiply, and rule theEarth. And Lucifer is their king, theirgod.So fair a world seemed a true semblanceof Heaven. But the canker of revolt whichhad cast them from Heaven, still lived withthem. And the spirit of jealousy, hatred,and pride begins to manifest itself, andgrows, and spreads, until the splendid

314

Earth becomes again a hell. But now theyare unable to bear any longer the sufferingwhich infests the Earth, and they .find nohelp or relief from Lucifer. In their deepdespair, they remember their Father, andturn to Him and pray again to God. AndGod, their Father, hears the cry of Hischildren, and from His Heart sends down tothem His Own Love. And Love comes downfrom Heaven to Earth, and Love becomesa human being; and Love lives with humanbeings and teaches human beings how tolove.But Lucifer, incarnate also as a human.being, sees the menace to his power, and ina passion of hate and jealousy rises againsthis Brother and slays his Brother. AndGod's Love shakes off the burden of theEarth, and Earth is without Love again.So sorrow and terror once more prevail, andthe suffering becomes intolerable. Againhuman beings cry out to God for help.And God, the Father, the loving Mother,hears the cry of His children, and from HisHeart sends down to them His Own Love.And Love comes down from Heaven to Earthagain and Love becomes a human being;and Love lives with human beings, andteaches them the Law of Love.But Lucifer, the World's Mind, againincarnate as a human being, rises againsthis Mate, his Eternal Twin, and causes Himto die, for he sees in Him the great menaceto his power. And once again, God's Love

315

returns to the Father, and again the earth isvoid of Love.So through the ages, whenever miseryand suffering increase upon the Earth so asto make life intolerable, the children of theEarth call out for a Deliverer. And alwaysLove, gentle and tender-hearted; comes totheir call and tries to save His brothers.But Lucifer ever rises against Him, kills Hisbody, and destroys His work, for Love is thecontinual menace to his power.And when for the last time, God's Lovecame down, to Earth, and lived the humblelife of a simple mortal, giving to Humanitythe greatest lesson that Love ever gave,Lucifer, incarnate as a human being, roseonce more against his Brother, betrayed Himand brought Him to His death upon thecross. But He, of Whom the World was notworthy, breathing His last breath, dying asa felon upon the accursed tree, prayed forthose who had crucified Him:"Father, forgive them, for they know notwhat they do. Father, forgive my brotherLucifer, for he knows not what he does."These burning words of love struckLucifer like lightning in his heart, and hewent out and made an end to his human self.And rising as a spirit, he beheld the great-ness of his brother's Love, and the endlessevil of his own age-old sin. He saw thesorrow and the suffering which came throughhim to all beings; and he felt that cold andstony heart of his melt and soften, and he

316

wept tears of blood, tears of fire. And thosetears fell on the Earth and the Earth trem-bled to its very foundation.Thus for the first time, after countlessages of revolt, did Lucifer lift up his eyes toGod, and words of prayer fell from his lips:"Father! I know the immensity of mysin, and do not beg for forgiveness formyself. For crimes like mine cannot beatoned. But oh! my Father, forgive them,those who followed me in my fall. Forgivethem, for they knew not what they did.No fault was theirs but that they loved memore than Thee, and listened to the magic ofmy words, the glitter of my Mind, so thatThy Laws were all forgotten. Therefore, Ipray Thee, forgive them and take them backto Thee: let them return to those pureSpheres of Light, where Bliss and Harmonyand Serenity are. But for myself, if by myeternal damnation I can win their eternalsalvation, I am ready to be damned forEternity."'Then from the Vaulted Silence, a Voice,gathering in its might the UnmeasuredEnergy of all the Worlds:"Lucifer, thy sacrifice is accepted-andthrough thy sacrifice shall the World besaved."And he, the proud one who had thoughthimself a god, bent his knees, and with hishead touched the dust of the ground.Like far-off thunder sounded his words:"Father, I thank Thee!"

317

And once again the Voice:"Lucifer, thou hast sinned much, butthou hast also loved much. Infinite is thysin, but infinite also is thy sacrifice; there-fore, art thou forgiven. Go into the World,live among the children of the World, andcarry to them the Light of Knowledge puri-fied by Love. Thus the veils of self-delusionwill be withdrawn one by one, limitationswill be removed, suffering conquered, sorrowtransmuted into Joy. And when the lasthuman fault shall have been destroyed,when all thy brothers will have come hack toMe, then only will come thy day of libera-tion. Thy pinions of inspiration, singed bythe fires of hell, will have grown againstrong enough to lift thee from this Earth andto bear thee back to Heaven. And there, atthe burnished Gates of Heaven, the Portalsof Eternal Harmony, shall Love, thyBrother, thine Eternal Mate, be waiting forthee, to lead thee back to Me!"And Lucifer went into the World. AndLucifer taught the World. And to the WorldLucifer carried the Light of Pure Knowledge,glowing with the flame of Love.

Night! The fragrance of a warm summernight pervades all things. The firmamentblazing with stars, and beyond the starsdarkness softly fading away. The radiantPalace, the sacred grove, and above them,the mountains of precious stones. And inthe sacred grove whose trees are talking with

318

the clouds, rest in sleep myriads of Beings ofEternal Light. Beneath the loftiest tree,the loftiest king of all the woods, lies onewhose countenance is as a God's. He liesin deep slumber; and bending over him,calling him softly with words of Love,stands his Mate, his Twin."Brother! Loved one, awake! Arise, myLucifer! The night is fading fast, andsoon the Day of Heaven will begin. Nowmust we sing again the praises to ourFather, and lift our voices in adoration andgratitude to God."Like far-off thunder came the questioningwords from trembling lips, and out ofsorrowful eyes a flash of lightning: "Oh!Where am I?"And the answer: "Thou art in Heaven,Lucifer."But again the question: "Where have Ibeen these ages? This fall, this sufferingthrough countless years; and always fightingthee, my loved one, destroying thy work andkilling thee. Where have I been?""Not for a single moment of time hastthou left Heaven, Lucifer. But with thybrothers in the sacred grove, beneath thegreat trees, hast thou slept the night,instead of with me in the Palace. Lonelywas I, my Brother, for I missed thy pres-ence."But these sorrows, these nights of dark-ness that I saw and lived? This suffering,these crimes, this agony? What were they

319

all-whence came they and where have theygone?"And the answer-burning words of Love"Beloved! It was nothing but a Dream."

320

LESSON SEVEN1. QUES. What is the most direct and

simple way to obtain SpiritualPower?

ANS. By performing one's ordinarydaily actions ENERGETICALLY,INTELLIGENTLY,ACCURATELY,and JOYFULLY.

2. QUES. Can Mental Vibrations be raisedinto Spiritual ones?

ANS. Not until Mind has learned thelesson of Truth and Love.

3. QUES. What is the theory of how toreach Spiritual Vibrations?

ANS. To become one with Spirit, onemust forget personality, andthrough Inspiration and Loverealize the Allness of the GreatPrinciple and one's oneness withIt.

4. QUES. How are Spiritual Vibrationsperceived?

ANS. Through all the senses, whichbecome so acute that they areable to register the highestvibrations.

5. QIJES. Is It advisable to deny senses inorder to perceive Spiritual Vibra-tions?

ANS. Denial of senses will not help;their refinement is needed.

6. QUES. Through which physical' channelare Spiritual Vibrations mosteasily contacted?

321

ANS. Through the Pineal Gland, lo-cated almost in the center of theupper part of the brain, behindthe Pituitary Body.

7. QUES. What part of our mental selfdoes the Pineal Gland represent?

ANS. It represents the Super-conscious-ness, of which it is the organ.

8. QUES. What effect do Spiritual Vibra-tions have on human beings?

ANS. They entirely change humannature from negative into posi-tive.

9. QUES. What is that change called?ANS. The Touch of Grace, Samadhi,

Nirvana, Paradisic Bliss.10. QUES. Can physical diseases also be

healed by Spiritual Vibrations?ANS. Yes, and instantaneously.

11. QUES. How long can Spiritual Vibrationsbe contacted?

ANS. As long as human beings canstand them. Too long a contactwith them would completely dis-solve the material body.

12. QUES. Is one always successful in con-tacting Spiritual Vibrations?

ANS. No. Favorable conditions mustcombine in harmonious co-opera-tion in order to bring about thatcontact.

13. QUES. What is the Baptism by theHoly Ghost?

ANS. It is the illumination through

322

Spiritual Power, the contact withSpiritual Vibrations.

14. QUES. What must precede that highestbaptism?

ANS. The Baptism by Fire.15. QUES. What is the Baptism by Fire?

ANS. It is the purification of the humanmind through knowledge aflamewith Love.

16. QUES. When will that Baptism come toHumanity?

ANS. It has already come to Human-ity, and is baptising it with itsradiant flame.

17. QUES. What preceded the Baptism byFire?

ANS. The Baptism by Water, whichpurifies the body.

18. QUES. What does the Baptism by Waterstand for?

ANS. For the regeneration of the bodythrough the use of the MagneticLife Force.

19. QUES. Can anyone reach the Baptismby Spirit, which means thepurification of the soul, withoutfirst having the mind purifiedthrough the Baptism by Fire, andthe body, through the Baptism byWater.

ANS. No.20. QUES. What do the three kinds of vibra-

tions, the Magnetic, the Mental,and the Spiritual, stand for?

323

ANS. They stand for the three-foldBaptism means the re-generation of human beings on theThree Planes.

21. QUET. What are the two Roads humanbeings walk upon in their life?

ANS. The Human Road, and theDivine Road.

22. QUES. What is the difference betweenthem?

ANS. The Human Road, relying uponhuman support, leads to failure.The Divine Road, based cx-elusively upon the Great Principleand its universal Forces andLaws, leads to success.

23. QUES. What is the most unreliable thingon Earth?

ANS. A human being.24. QUES. What is the one power on which

to rely completely?ANS. The Power of the Absolute, called

also the Great Principle, or God.25. QUES. What is the origin of Evil?

ANS. The belief in separation from AllPower.

26. QUES. Did that separation ever actuallytake place?

ANS. No. It is nothing but a dreamwhich Humanity is dreaming.

27. QUES. What does the legend "TheDream" represent?

ANS. It represents the tragic Historyof Mind

324

28. QUES. Who are the two principal charac-ters of that Legend?

ANS. Two Brothers, heavenly Twins,Lucifer and Christ.

29. QUES. What do they stand for?ANS. For Mind and Love respectively.

30. QUES. Where does the action take place?ANS. in the realm of Eternal Harmony,

commonly called Heaven.31. QUES. Explain briefly the legend.

ANS. In the secrecy of Silence, Luciferand Christ are performing theireternal duties of keeping watchover the World. Being the firstdual manifestation of the GreatPrinciple, they are, as Mind andLove, the two greatest powers ofthis World. Mind, feeling him-self to be the possessor of allknowledge and power, refuses toacknowledge the Source of AllPower, his own Father, theEternally Unmanifest, called God,and claims that power as his own.He offers to share the power ofthis World with his twin brother,Love. Christ refuses to give upHis God, and warns Lucifer ofthe great danger of pride. Luci-fer, or Mind, then decides torule the World alone, and to sub-stitute his power for that of God.lie sends his call throughout theWorld, lie beguiles those fellow

325

spirits who respond to his callwith wonderful promises if theywill follow his lead, and theyproclaim him their liberator andtheir god. Having broken awayfrom All Power, Lucifer (Mind),loses the greater part of hispower, and falls from his highestate, together with those whofollowcd him. This fall is calledthe Involution into Matter, whichis itself nothing but the productof the involutionary process.Though fallen, Lucifer's pride isstill unbroken, and with theremnant of his knowledge andpower, he tries to create out ofthe Hell into which they havebeen precipitated, out of theboiling, fiery mass of pride,revolt, jealousy and hatred, anew heaven which he calls Earth,and he makes human beings outof his fellow spirits. Mind, Inhis utter pride, wants to createhis own world after the divinepattern. Seemingly successful inthe beginning, he ultimately failscompletely. Pride, revolt, jeal-ously, hatred, all permeating hiscreation, make again a Hell out ofthe heaven which he thought hehad created. His twin brother,Love, comes to the rescue, but

326

Mind, out of' jealousy, continu-ally fights the only one who couldhelp him. Through ages thatfight goes on, until Love wins,and Mind (Lucifer) acknowledgeshis defeat. There comes to himthe realization of the immensityof his mistake, and he decidesto face eternal damnation inorder to save Humanity. Hissacrifice is accepted, but throughhis own sacrifice the negative inhim is destroyed, and the positiveand eternal is brought out. Hegoes out into the World to learnthe lesson of Love, and hismission as Mind is to teachHumanity that All Power comesfrom God alone. Thus he bringsback all human beings to theRealm of Eternal Harmony,called Heaven, and redeems him-self also. And when that workhas been completed, though seem-ingly it lasts through countlessages, and is so real to him, herealizes that all that negative andsad experience was nothing but adream.

327

Having learned the lesson of Love, Mindbecomes one with it, in the Bosom of theirEternal Father, God.Every human being horn to this Earthis experiencing within himself that livingdream of Mind. Mind is continually fightingagainst Love, the Luciferian principle com-batting the Christ Principle, and when theChrist Principle, Love wins, then Lucifer,the fallen Mind, is redeemed and theliberated individual is awakened to his truestatus of Eternal Perfection as a Son of God.

328